0% found this document useful (0 votes)

225 views364 pages

Wonst Catalog

The document discusses WON ST's linear motion guides. It describes their high load capacity, rigidity, precision, long life, low noise, and self-adjusting compatibility between the rail and block. The guide has a four-row circular face-to-face duplex structure and is a 4-direction equal load type. The document then provides information on selecting, calculating life, rigidity, preload, and friction for various types of linear motion guides.

Uploaded by

Laurentiu

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

225 views364 pages

Wonst Catalog

Uploaded by

Laurentiu

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 364

High-quality High-performance

Linear Motion Guide

WON ST Linear Motion Guide is a four-row circular face-to-face duplex structure and a
4-direction equal load type which is excellent in bearing high load with high rigidity as well
as compatibility between a rail and a block, and allows smooth and precise operation.

High
precision

High
Long life
rigidity

Auto-
Low noise
adjusting

Compati-
bility
WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide - H series

H-F H-FL H-R H-RL

p.50 p.50 p.52 p.52

Spacer Chain Guide - H-S series

H-SF H-SFL H-SR H-SRL

p.54 p.54 p.56 p.56

Wide Linear Motion Guide - HW series

HW-F HW-R

p.60 p.62

WON ST CO., LTD.

Slim Linear Motion Guide - S series

S-C S-R S-CF S-F

p.68 p.68 p.70 p.70

Slim Spacer Chain Guide - S-S series

S-SC S-SR S-SCF S-SF

p.72 p.72 p.74 p.74

Slim Linear Motion Guide - HS series

HS-R HS-RL

p.78 p.78

Slim Spacer Chain Guide - HS-S series

HS-SR HS-SRL

p.80 p.80

WON ST CO., LTD.

Miniature Linear Motion Guide - M series

M-C M-N M-L

p.86 p.86 p.86

Miniature Wide Linear Motion Guide - MB series

MB-C MB-N MB-L

p.88 p.88 p.88

Roller Linear Motion Roller Guide - R series

R-F R-FL R-R R-RL

p.94 p.94 p.96 p.96

WON ST CO., LTD.

Crossed Roller Bearing

p.115

p.116

WON ST CO., LTD.

Compact Ball Spline

WSP WSPL WSPT WSPTF

p.154 p.156 p.158 p.160

WSPF WSPFL WSPK WSPKL

p.162 p.164 p.166 p.168

WSPTO WSPTFO

p.170 p.171

Linear Ball Spline

WLS WLSF

p.174 p.176

WON ST CO., LTD.

Cross Roller Guide Way

WRG WRGO WRG-AC WRGW

Patent
Applied

p.192 p.196 p.198 p.200

WRGT WRGT-B WRGU WRGU-AC

p.202 p.204 p.206 p.210

WON ST CO., LTD.

Super Ball Bushing - Asia series

SB Bearing SBO Bearing SH Block SHW Block

p.222 p.223 p.224 p.225

SH-A Block SHO Block

p.226 p.227

WON ST CO., LTD.

Super Ball Bushing - Europe series

SBE Bearing SBEO Bearing CS Bearing CS-A Bearing

p.228 p.229 p.230 p.231

CSW Block CSW-A Block CSO Block CSO-A Block

p.232 p.233 p.234 p.235

CSOW Block CSOW-A Block

p.236 p.237

Super Ball Bushing - Inch series

SBA Bearing SBAO Bearing

p.238 p.238

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Ball Bushing - Asia series

LM LM□OP LM□AJ LMF

p.256 p.256 p.256 p.260

LMK LMH LMF□L LMK□L

p.260 p.260 p.262 p.262

LM□L SC SCWN

p.264 p.265 p.266

Linear Ball Bushing - Europe series

LME LME□OP LME□AJ LME□L

p.258 p.258 p.258 p.264

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Shaft

STANDARD SHAFT HOLLOW SHAFT WK S-ST

p.271 p.271 p.277 p.278

ST S-STU STU Slide Rail Unit

p.279 p.280 p.281 p.282

WON ST CO., LTD.

Track Roller Guide - outside type

STF TS TS...H TC

p.295 p.296 p.296 p.298

TF TW

p.300 p.302

Track Roller Guide - inside type

TRI-Standard TRI-Long

p.304 p.306

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Contents

1 Linear Motion Guide 8 Surface Treatment •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 28

1. Characteristics• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2
2. Strengths• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2
3. Types• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3 9 Dust Proof •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 28

2 Selection of Linear Motion Guide

1. Overview• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4 10 Measure to Use in Special Environment •• • • • • 29
2. Procedure• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4

3 Life Calculation 11 Placement & Installation •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 30

1. Load rating and life• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5

2. Load calculation• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6 12 Types of Linear Motion Guide
3. Service condition setting•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6
4. Load calculation formula•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7 1. Linear Motion Guide H Series•• • • • • • • • • 46
5. Equivalent load calculation• • • • • • • • • • • • • • 11 2. Spacer Chain Guide H-S Series• • • • • • • 46
6. Equivalent load calculation formula•• • • • 11 3. Wide Linear Motion Guide HW Series• • • 58
7. Static safety factor calculation• • • • • • • • • • 12 4. S lim Linear Motion Guide S Series•• • • • • • 64
8. Mean load calculation•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 13 5. S lim Spacer Chain Linear Motion Guide
9. Rating life calculation• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 14 S-S Series•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 64
6. S lim Linear Motion Guide HS, HS-S Series•• • 76
4 Rigidity& Preload 7. M iniature Linear Motion Guide M Series• • • • 82
8. Wide Miniature Linear Motion Guide
1. Preload• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 16 MB Series• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 82
2. Radial clearance•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 17 9. Roller Linear Motion Guide R Series• • • • 90
5 Friction
1. Friction•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 19 13 Options
2. Friction coefficient• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 19
1. Seal and rail cap•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 98
2. Oil filler•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 102
6 Precision 3. Grease Nipple •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 103
1. Precision specification• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 20 4. Connection of oil pipes•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 104
2. Precision design• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 20 5. H
ow to install Linear Motion guide using a
3. Dimension Tolerance and Difference•• • • • 20 support rail• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 105
4. Selection of Precision Class•• • • • • • • • • • • • 24

7 Lubrication 14 Instructions for Handling

1. Purpose•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 26 1. Handling• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 106
2. Selection of lubricant• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 26 2. Lubrication•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 106
3. Grease lubrication• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 26 3. Caution for use•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 106
4. Oil lubrication• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 27 4. Storage• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 106

Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Crossed Roller Bearing

Contents

1 Structure and characteristic 7 Permissible rpm •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 122

of Crossed Roller Bearing
1. Structure•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 114
2. Characteristics• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 114 8 Lubrication •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 122
3. Use• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 114
9 Cautions in designing compression plate
2 Kind of Crossed Roller Bearing and housing

1. CB series of revolving inner ring 1. Housing design for installation •• • • • • • • • • • 122

•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 115 2. Tap for separation• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 122
2. CH series for high stiffness 3. Installation & assembly•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 123
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 115 4. SeIection of compressin flange and bolt• • • • • 123
3. CA series of Slim revolving inner ring
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 116
4. CS series for customized special type 10 Fitting • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 125
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 116

3 Selection of Crossed Roller Bearing 11 Precision of Crossed Roller Bearing •• • • • • 126

1. Selection summary•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 117
2. Selection sequence• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 117 12 Precision of WUP class
4 Nominal numbering •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 118 1. R
otation accuracy of WUP class of
Crossed-Roller Bearing(example)• • • • • • • • • 130
5 Calculation of service life 2. Precision standard• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 130
1. Rated service life•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 118
2. Calculation of service life under heaving 13 Radial clearance •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 130
operation condition•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 119
3. Static safety factor(fs)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 119
4. Static equivalent load(Po)•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 120
14 Dimension of Crossed Roller Bearing
5. Dynamic equivalent radial load(Pc)•• • • • • 120 1. CB series• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 132
6. Load factor(fw)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 121 2. CH series•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 134
3. CA series• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 136
6 Rated load
1. Basic dynamic rated load(C)•• • • • • • • • • • • • 121 15 Cautions when handling Crossed Roller
2. Basic static rated load(Co)•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • 121 Bearing• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 137

Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Ball Spline
Contents

1 Ball Spline 6 Lubrication and contamination prevention

of Ball Spline•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 150
1. Structures & Features•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 140
2. Transmission of High Torque • • • • • • • • • 140
3. High load capacity and long life•• • • • • • 140
4. Zero Gap• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 140 7 Assembly •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 151

8 Caution in Use •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 151

2 Selection of Ball Spline
1. Overview• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 141 9 Compact Ball Spline
2. Procedure •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 141 1. Structure and Feature•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 152
2. High torque transfer • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 152
3. High load capacity and long life•• • • • • • 152
3 Life Calculation
1. Life• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 142 10 Linear Ball Spline
2. Rating fatigue life(L)•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 142
3. Static safety factor(fs)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 144 1. Structure and Feature•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 172
4. Basic dynamic load rating(C)•• • • • • • • • • 145 2. High load capacity and long life • • • • • • 172
5. Basic static load rating(Co)• • • • • • • • • • • • 145 3. Precise torque tranfer• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 172
6. Basic dynamic rating torque(T)• • • • • • • 145 4. High speed movement,
7. Basic static rating torque(To) High speed rotation•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 172
Basic static rating moment(TM)•• • • • • • • 145 5. Product classification•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 172
6. Easy for futher processing • • • • • • • • • • • • 172

4 Pre-load of Ball Spline • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 146

5 Accuracy •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 147

Ball Spline
WON ST CO., LTD.

Cross Roller Guide Way

Contents

1 Cross Roller Guide Way

1. Delicate slide, High rigidity & High accuracy• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 180
2. Low noise•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 180
3. Correspondence in load-direction & Zero-clearance• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 180

2 Anti-Creep Cross Roller Guide Way

1. Meet the application diversity•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 181
2. Low Noise and working very smoothly•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 181
3. Keep high load performance by the sound compatibility of assembly dimensions between old and
new one•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 181

3 Types & Features •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 182

4 Accuracy •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 183

5 Safe working load & Service life •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 184

6 Pre-load •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 186

7 Accuracy of Mounting surface •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 187

8 Installation Method •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 187

9 Lubrication & Contamination Prevention •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 189

10 Caution in Use •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 190

Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

Super Ball Bushing

Contents

1 Super Ball Bushing

1. 27 Times longer Travel life (3 Times Higher Load Capacity)•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 214
2. 0.5° Self-Aligning• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 214
3. Ease of Replacement• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 214
4. High speed and Fast acceleration• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 214
5. Ease of Adjusting the radial clearance•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 215
6. Installation cost reduction• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 215
7. Smooth Running• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 215
8. Environmental Temperature• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 215

2 Super Ball Bushing Type

1. Asian Standard•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 216
2. European Standard•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 217
3. Inch Standard• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 217

3 Life Span
1. Basic Dynamic Load Rating (C)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 218
2. Hardness factor(fH)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 218
3. Temperature factor(fT)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 219
4. Load direction factor(fD)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 219
5. Basic Static Load Rating(Co)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 219
6. Housing and Shaft tolerance• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 220

4 Assembly •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 221

Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Ball Bushing

Contents

1 Linear Ball Bushing •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 242 7 Mounting of LM case unit

1. Mounting of SH type•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 254
2 Types and Characteristics •• • • • • • • • • • • • • 243

3 Part Number 8 Cautions in use

1. Standard Tolerance•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 245 1. Mounting of Linear Bushing• • • • • • • • • • • 254
2. Load Rating & Travel Life•• • • • • • • • • • • • • 245 2. Insertion of Shaft•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 255
3. Calculation Example• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 246 3. When Moment loads applied• • • • • • • • • • 255
4. Calculation of expected Travel Life• • • 247 4. Avoid the Rotational Motion• • • • • • • • • • • 255
5. M
ounting of open type Linear Ball Bushing
with three ball rows•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 255
4 Equivalent factor •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 247

5 Lubrication & Friction

1. Grease Lubrication• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 249
2. Oil Lubrication•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 249
3. Coefficient of Friction•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 250

6 Assembly
1. Tolerance of Housing Bore• • • • • • • • • • • • 251
2. Clearance of Outer Sleeve and Shaft• • • • • • • 251
3. Mounting•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 252
4. Standard type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 252
5. Retaining ring for Mounting•• • • • • • • • • • • 252
6. Setscrew Mounting Prohibited• • • • • • • • 252
7. Flange type•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 253
8. Mounting of Adjustable type• • • • • • • • • • • 253
9. Mounting of Open type•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 253
10. Mounting of Shaft support•• • • • • • • • • • • 254

Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Shaft

Contents

1 LM Shaft
1. Type of LM Shaft•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 268
2. Materials•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 269

2 Heat Treatment • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 269

3 Precision Class ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 270

4 Equation of Deflection-Angle of LM Shaft

1. Case hardened & ground shaft•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 271
2. Hollow shaft• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 271

5 Part Number of LM Shaft

1. Type number format I (Case hardened & ground shaft)•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 272
2. Type number format II (Hollow shaft)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 274
3. Type number format III (Tapped shaft)•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 275

6 LM Shaft End Support Block & Rail

1. Shaft End Support Block• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 276
2. Shaft Support Rail• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 276

Linear Motion Shaft

WON ST CO., LTD.

Track Roller Guide

Contents

1 T.R Guide 6 End Seal(T type) •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 292

1. Structure & Features• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 284
2. Speed and Noise• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 285
3. Adjustable Clearance• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 285
4. Load Capacity in any direction• • • • • • • • 285 7 Cap Seal •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 292
5. Perfect Sealing and Lubrication•• • • • • • 285
6. Available Temperature• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 285
7. Easy Installation• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 285

8 Cap Seal Assembly •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 292

2 Guide Rail Series

1. Outside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 286 9 Accuracy •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 293
2. Inside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 287

3 Types of Block 10 Service Life

1. Outside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 288 1. Basic Dynamic Load Ratings C
2. Inside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 289 (Basic Dynamic Moment M)• • • • • • • • • • • 294
2. Basic Static Load Ratings Co
(Basic Static Moment Mo)• • • • • • • • • • • • • 294
3. Maximum allowable load•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • 294
4 Assembly and Adjustment 4. Service Life depending loads in any
1. Outside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 290 direction•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 294
2. Inside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 291 5. Service Life depending moment in any
direction•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 294

5 Track Roller •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 292

Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Appendix
Contents

1 Conversion Table from SI (Internation System of Units) •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 316

2 N-kgf Conversion Table •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 318

3 kg-lb Conversion Table • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 319

4 Hardness Conversion Table •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 320

5 Dimensional Tolerance of Axis •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 322

6 Dimensional Tolerance of Housing Hole •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 324

7 Usage examples of Linear Motion Guide •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 326

8 Usage examples of Crossed Roller Bearing • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 334

Appendix
LINEAR MOTION GUIDE
A Linear Motion Guide

1 WON Linear Motion Guide

1. Characteristics
Linear Motion Guide is a straight-line motion bearing with the structure in which rolling elements
such as balls or rollers softly circulate the inner part of the block and the block can make an infinite
straight-line motion along the raceway surface of a rail.

2. Strengths
1) Able to make a precise positioning
Since there is less difference between static friction and kinetic friction as well as in speed-induced friction
fluctuation, it excellently responds even to micro-migration, allowing precise positioning.
2) Able to maintain accuracy stably for a long time
Less friction coefficient and wear due to ideal rolling motion allows the stable maintenance of accuracy for
a long time.
3) Able to eliminate clearance or increase rigidity by preloading
It is possible to eliminate clearance by using rolling elements such as a ball or a roller or increase rigidity of
Linear Motion Guide by preloading.
4) Lubrication is simple.
Lubrication is simple but it uses grease or oil which makes it convenient to maintain.
5) Able to compact equipment and save cost for operating electricity
It can be made into compact miniaturized equipment because friction is low despite highly-rigid high-loading,
which saves manufacturing costs and energy.

2 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

3. Types
WON ST offers various types of Linear Motion guide from miniature types to general ball Linear
Motion guide to low-sound linear motion guide to ultra high-rigid roller linear motion guide. Since
each supports different shapes and sizes according to service conditions, you can select the optimal
linear motion guide to each usage.

• World standard ball Linear Motion guide

•4-direction equal load type with 40°contact angle
Linear Motion
•Great error-absorbing ability with D/F combination
Guide
•H igh-rigid highly accurate straight-line motion
through ideal rolling motion

• It is a compact highly-rigid 4-direction equal

load type with 45 degrees, and suitable for
Wide Linear
use in a one-axis type since it is wider and
Motion Guide
lower heights than the general miniature linear
motion guide and rigidity increased.

• World standard ball Linear Motion guide

Spacer Chain • 4-direction equal load type with 45°con tact angle
Linear Motion • Great error-absorbing ability with D/F combination
Guide • Spacer-enabled retainer type with low noise low
dust raise straight-line motion device

• Miniature high-rigidity
Miniature Linear • Various shapes and sizes
Motion Guide • Highly-durable and reliable compact straight-line
motion device

• Roller-enabled ultra-rigid linear motion guide

• 4-direction equal load type with 40°contact angle
Roller Linear • Able to run reliably for a long time through rolling motion
Motion Guide having wide contact surface
• High-load, high-rigid, highly accurate straight-line
motion

Linear Motion Guide 3

A Linear Motion Guide

2 Selection of Linear Motion Guide

1. Overview
To select Linear Motion guide, most of all identify detailed requirements and prioritize the requirements
to select the Linear Motion Guide suitable for the service conditions.

2. Procedure
1 Identify service equipment, maintenance structure, installation space, assembly status,
conditions functional requirements, service conditions

2 Select the type Select the appropriate type by considering motion condition, load level,
of Linear Motion guide rigidity, friction, and assembly

3 Select the Determine the model number and the quantity of blocks by considering
model number
of Linear Motion guide the space and load

4
Calculate load Calculate the load in vertical and horizontal directions and moment

5 Calculate
Calculate each load applied to the block by converting it into equivalent load
equivalent load

6 Calculate Calculate each load applied to the block and variable load during decelera-
mean load tion by converting them into mean load

7 Calculate static Calculate the static safety factor identified by basic load rating and max. equi-
safety factor valent load and check if it fits for service conditions

8
Calculate life Check if it fits for service conditions by calculating load rating and life

9 Review preload
Select the preload and clearance suitable for service conditions
& clearance

10 Determine the
Determine the class of precision required by Linear Motion guide while driving
class of precision

11 Lubrication, Select lubricant suitable for the environment using grease, oil, and special
dust proof, grease lubrication and select seal for dust proof / determine the method of
surface handling surface handing for rust prevention and low dust raise
12 Complete
Complete the decision of final specifications of Linear Motion guide
selection

4 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

3 Life Calculation
1. Load rating and life
(1) Life
If external load is applied to Linear Motion guide while driving, fatigue fracture occurs by stress created as load
is repeatedly applied to the raceway surface and rolling elements, and flaking -peeling off in scale-like flakes
arises. A total driving distance until flaking occurs due to initial fatigue fracture is the life of a linear motion guide.
•D
efects may occur in Linear Motion guide earlier than when flaking normally occurs due to wear
or fatigue in the following cases:

a. Excess load by the imprecise assembly following a difference in temperature or tolerance

b. If Linear Motion guide is contaminated with foreign substance
c. Driving with insufficient lubrication
d. Reciprocating motion in a very short distance in the form of vibration or wave during the halt or drive
e. Excessive load to Linear Motion guide
f. Deformation of plastic end-plate

2) Rating fatigue life L

Generally Linear Motion guide does not always have same life even though the products are manufactured
in the same way because of the difference in scattering of raw material’s original fatigue. For this reason, the
reference value of life is defined as the rating fatigue life which is a total driving distance that flaking does
not occur in 90% of Linear Motion guides in a group when having them run under the same conditions by
grouping multiple Linear Motion guides with same specifications into a group.

When using a ball When using a roller

(3) Basic dynamic load rating C

Basic dynamic load rating is Linear Motion guide’s bearing of load which represents an applicable constant
load in direction and magnitude when the rated life is 50KM. The reference value of WON Linear Motion
Guide’s basic dynamic load rating is 50KM (ball type) and 100KM (roller type). It is used for calculating Linear
Motion guide’s life while driving under constant load in magnitude from the center of a block to bottom.
Each value of basic dynamic load rating (C) is stated in the catalogue.

(4) Basic static load rating C0

If Linear Motion guide is applied by excessive load or attached instantly by big impact load, a partially permanent deform-
ation occurs between a rolling element and the raceway surface. If deformation reaches to a certain extent, it hinders
a smooth driving. Basic static load rating is defined as the constant static load in direction and magnitude with the per-
manent deformation that occurs between a rolling element like a ball or a roller and the raceway surface of block and
rail 0.0001 times bigger than the diameter of the rolling element. In Linear Motion guide, it is the load applied from top
to bottom based on the center of the block. Each value of basic static load rating (C0) is stated in the specification table.

Linear Motion Guide 5

A Linear Motion Guide

(5) Static allowable moment Mo

Moment load can be applied to Linear Motion guide. Here, a ball or a roller both at the ends is most stressed due
to the stress distribution of a ball or a roller which is the rolling element inside Linear Motion guide. Static allowable
moment refers to the constant moment load in direction and magnitude when the permanent deformation between
a ball or a roller applied with the biggest stress and the raceway surface of a block or a rail is less than 0.0001 of the
diameter of the rolling element. Moment values of three directions (Mp, My, Mr) are stated in the specification sheet.
Static allowable moment (Mo) and static moment load rating (Mp) can be reviewed by applying safety factor (fs).

Directions of
load and moment

2. Load Calculation
Linear Motion guide bears basic dynamic load rating (C) and basic static load rating (C0). But compression load
applied from top to down due to inertia force created by the center of gravity, positioning thrust, acceleration, cutting
force, and deceleration as well as various loads including tensile load, horizontal load, and moment load can be ap-
plied to Linear Motion guide depending on the service conditions. In this case, load of Linear Motion guide changes.
When selecting Linear Motion guide, it is required to review these conditions and calculate proper load.

3. Service Condition Setting

Service conditions necessary for calculating the load and life of Linear Motion guide :
① Mass : m (kg) ⑥ Velocity diagram Velocity : V(mm/s)
② Applicable load direction Time constant : tn(s)
③ Point of application : ℓ 2, ℓ 3, h1(mm) Acceleration : αn(mm/s)
(center of gravity) ⑦ No. of reciprocating motion/second : N1(min-1)
④ Point of thrust : ℓ 4, h2(mm) ⑧ Stroke : Ls(mm)
⑤ Composition of Linear Motion guide : ℓ 0, ℓ 1(mm) ⑨ Avg. velocity : Vm(m/s)
(No. of block & rail) ⑩ Required life : Lh(h)
velocity

velocity diagram

Figure 1. Service Condition

6 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

4. Load Calculation Formula
Load applied to Linear Motion guide changes due to external forces such as the center of gravity, pos-
ition of thrust, acceleration, and cutting resistance. To select Linear Motion guide, you should calculate
load applied to the block by fully considering the conditions below.

m : Mass (kg) g : Acceleration of gravity(g : 9.8m/s2) (m/s2)

ℓn : Distance (mm) V : Velocity (m/s)
Fn : Thrust (N) tn : Time constant (s)
Pn : Load (vertical, reverse-vertical) (N) αn : Acceleration (m/s2)
PnT : Load (horizontal) (N)

Case Service Conditions Load Calculation Formula

Block move
Horizontal / uniform motion / halt

Block move
Overhang-horizontal / uniform motion / halt

Linear Motion Guide 7

A Linear Motion Guide

Case Service Conditions Load Calculation Formula

Rail move
Horizontal / uniform motion / halt

E.g.) X or Z axis
Loader/unLoader

Block move
Wall installation / uniform motion / halt

E.g.) Gantry-type
device
Y-axis drive

Block move
Vertical / uniform motion / halt

E.g.) Industrial robot

Z-axis
Auto-painting spray,
lifter

8 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Case Service Conditions Load Calculation Formula
Block move
Vertical/moment of inertia Acceleration

Uniform
motion

Deceleration

E.g.) Conveyance robot,

LTR robot 2-axis

Block move
Cutting load / complex external load
F1 application

F2 application
7

F3 application

E.g.) Machine tool, CNC shelf,

machining center, NC milling machine

Linear Motion Guide 9

A Linear Motion Guide

Case Service Conditions Load Calculation Formula

Block move
Moment load in case of application to side slope
/ cutting load

E.g.) CNC shelf, reciprocating carriage

Block move
Moment load in case of application to front slope
/ cutting load

E.g.) CNC shelf, tool rest

10 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Case Service Conditions Load Calculation Formula
Block move Acceleration
Horizontal application
/ inertia force application

10 Constant velocity

Deceleration
Velocity(m/s)

E.g.) Industrial robot

Time(s) carriage,
Velocity diagram LCD test device

5. Equivalent Load Calculation

There are diverse kinds of load applied to Linear Motion guide, such as compression load in vertical
direction, tensile load, horizontal load, moment load, etc. There is also combined load of them and
sometimes the magnitude and direction of load change. Since it is hard to calculate the variable load
when calculating the life of Linear Motion guide, it is required to use equivalent load which is converted
to compression load or tensile load in vertical direction in order to produce life or static safety factor.

6. Equivalent Load Calculation Formula

If Linear Motion guide bears vertical compression load or tensile load or horizontal load simultaneously,
or the magnitude or direction of load changes, equivalent load is calculated using the following formula.
Pn : Compression load
PE(equivalent load) = Pn + PnT
PnT : Horizontal load

Pn : Compression load
PL : Tensile load
PnT : Horizontal load
Mp : Pitching moment
My : Yawing moment
Mr : Rolling moment

Figure 2.

Linear Motion Guide 11

A Linear Motion Guide

7. Static Safety Factor Calculation

Unexpected big load may be applied to Linear Motion guide due to inertia force caused by vibration impact or quick
braking and moment load of mechanical structure. When selecting Linear Motion guide, static safety factor must be
taken into account to be ready for such load. Static safety factor (fs) is shown in value obtained by dividing basic
static load rating by the calculated load. To see the baseline of static safety factor by service condition, please refer
to Table 1-1. and Table 1-2.

Table 1-1. Baseline of static safety factor(fs)

Type of rolling element Service condition Static safety factor (fs)

There is no vibration and impact. 1.0 ~ 1.5
Ball Great travel performance is needed. 1.5 ~ 2.0
There are moment load, violation, and impact. 2.5 ~ 7.0
There is no vibration and impact. 2.0 ~ 3.0
Roller Great travel performance is needed. 3.0 ~ 5.0
There are moment load, violation, and impact. 4.0 ~ 7.0

Table 1-2.

If compression
load is big

If tensile load is big

If horizontal load is big

fS : Static safety factor PL : Calculated load (reverse-vertical) (N)

C0 : Basic static load rating(vertical) (N) PnT : Calculated load (horizontal) (N)
C0L : Basic static load rating(reverse-vertical) (N) fH : Hardness factor
C0T : Basic static load rating(horizontal) (N) fT : Temperature factor
Pn : Calculated load(vertical) (N) fC : Contact factor

12 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

8. Mean Load Calculation
Load applied to the block of Linear Motion guide is not constant, but differs according to service conditions. Here the
load that becomes equal to life under variable load is used. This is called mean load. If the load applied to block is
changed due to external condition, it is required to calculate life as mean load that includes various conditions as below.
If load applied to block varies with different conditions, life should be calculated by including this variable load
condition. Mean load (Pm) refers to constant load that becomes equal to life under this variable load when the
load applied to block changes with various conditions while traveling.

Pm : Mean load (N)

Pn : Variable load (N)
L : Total travel distance (mm)
Ln : Travel distance by loading Pn (mm)
: Ball - 3, Roller - 10/3

Note) the formula above or formula (1) below is applied to a ball.

1) Change in phase 2) Change monotonously

Pm : Mean load (N) Pmin : Minimum load (N)

Pn : Variable load (N) Pmax : Maximum load (N)
L : Total travel distance (mm)
Ln : Travel distance by loading Pn (mm)
Load P

Load P

Total travel distance L

3) Change in a sine curve

Load P

Total travel distance L Total travel distance L

Linear Motion Guide 13

A Linear Motion Guide

9. Rating Life Calculation

Rating life needs to be calculated because Linear Motion guide’s life differs even under same working
conditions. Rating life of Linear Motion guide is the total travel distance that a Linear Motion guide sys-
tem composed of a certain number of units can drive until flaking does not occur in 90% of the raceway
surface or rolling elements after being run under same working conditions. If a ball or a roller is used as
a rolling element, rating life can be calculated using the following formula.

▶ Calculation formula of the rating life of ball-enabled Linear Motion guide

L : Rating life (km)
C : Basic dynamic load rating (N)
PC : Calculated load (N)
fH : Hardness factor See Fig. 3
fT : Temperature factor See Fig. 4
fC : Contact factor See Table 2
fW : Load factor See Table 3

▶ Calculation formula of the rating life of roller-enabled Linear Motion guide

▶ If the length of stroke and the number of reciprocating motion are constant, life time can be calculated
using rating life (L) by the formula below.

Lh : Life time (N)

s : Length of stroke (mm)
n1 : No. of reciprocating motion per minute (mm-1)

14 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

1) Hardness factor (fH)
To realize the best performance of Linear Motion guide,
the proper hardness and depth should be maintained

Hardness factor (fH)

between the block contacting a rolling element (ball or
roller) and the raceway surface of rail.
WON Linear Motion guide has HRC58-64 surface
hardness, so there is no need to consider hardness
factor. But if the hardness is lowered than baseline,
Linear Motion guide’s load capacity decreases so
hardness factor needs to be reflected in calculating life.
Rolling surface hardness (HRC)
Figure 3. Hardness factor (fH)

2) Temperature factor (fT)

If high temperature over 100℃ is applied to Linear
Temperature factor (fT)

Motion guide, temperature factor (fT) needs to be

taken into account when selecting Linear Motion
guide. WON Linear Motion guide must be used at
less than 80℃. But you have to use it at over 80℃,
please use a high-temp Linear Motion guide - WON
ST’s specially customized product.

Rolling surface temperature

Figure 4. Temperature factor (fT)

Note) In ambient temperature of over 80℃, materi-
als for seal, end plate, and support plate should be
changed to the specifications for high temperature.

Table 2.
3) Contact factor (fc) No. of blocks contacted Contact factor (fc)
If over two blocks of Linear Motion guide are closely
2 0.81
assembled, since uniform load may not be applied
to blocks due to difference among mounting sur- 3 0.72
faces, you have to multiply basic static load rating 4 0.66
(C) and basic dynamic load rating (C0) by contact 5 0.61
factor shown in Table 2. Over 6 0.6
Common use 1.0

Linear Motion Guide 15

A Linear Motion Guide

4) Load factor (fw)

Generally the static load applied to the block of Linear Motion guide can be calculated by formula. But the load ap-
plied to the block while running the machine tends to come from vibration or impact. Therefore, you have to consider
load factor (fw) shown in Table 3 for the vibration or impact load during the speedy running of the machine. It can be
calculated by dividing the basic dynamic load rating of Linear Motion guide by load factor (fw).
Table 3.
External condition Service conditions Load factor (fw)
Low There is no external vibration or impact due to the smooth running of machine at mild speed. 1.0 ~ 1.3
Moderate There is moderate external vibration or impact due to the running of machine at low speed. 1.2 ~ 1.5
Big There is strong vibration or impact due to the running of machine at fast speed. 1.5 ~ 2.0
Very big There is strong vibration or impact due to the running of machine at very fast speed. 2.0 ~ 4.0

4 Rigidity & Preload

1. Preload
Linear Motion guide is preloaded in a way that improves mechanical precision by eliminating clearance using the
rolling element (ball or roller) inserted into the space between rail and the block or in a way that applies load to the
rolling element in advance by inserting the rolling element larger in size than the clearance of raceway between rail
and the block. This process will enhance the rigidity of Linear Motion guide and lessen the displacement level caused
by external load.

Block rolling surface

Elastic displacement

Common
After ball assembly clearance
G1
clearance
G2
clearance
Before ball assembly Rail rolling surface
block rail P preload

Preload setting Data of preload and rigidity

Moment rigidity Radial rigidity

16 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

2. Radial Clearance
Radial clearance refers to the total travel distance in a radial direction from the center of the block of Linear
Motion guide when mild load is applied to the block up and down from the center part of the rail length after the
block is assembled in the rail which is then fixed to base.
Radial clearance is usually classified into common clearance (no symbol), G1 clearance (light preload), G2
clearance (heavy load), and Gs clearance (special preload), and are optional depending on usage. The values
are standardized by form.
Preload & elastic displacement Preload type Preload symbol Preload
Moderate No symbol 0 ~ 0.03 x C
Ball not preloaded H Light G1 0.04 ~ 0.08 x C
Ball preloaded Heavy G2 0.09 ~ 0.13 x C
Ball diameter
10mm Roller not preloaded
Moderate No symbol 0 ~ 0.03 x C
S Light G1 0.03 ~ 0.05 x C
Roller preloaded
Heavy G2 0.06 ~ 0.08 x C
Roller diameter
10mm x 10mm
Load (N)

Table 4. Service condition for radial clearance (preload)

Type Preload status Symbol Service Conditions Use

·Load is applied in uniform direction Welding machine, textile machinery,
Plus-minus No and smooth running is needed. packaging machinery, various convey-
1. Moderate ors, medical equipment, woodworking
clearance (1) ·There is almost no vibration or impact machine, glass cutting machine, take-
and precise running is required. out robots, ATC, winding machine
·There is a little vibration or impact and Various industrial robots, measuring
Minus equipment, inspection equipment, 3D
G1 moment load.
2. Light clearance in processor, laser processor, PCB drilling
(2) ·Light load is applied, yet high precision machine, various assembling machine,
small amount is required. electric spark machine, punching press

Minus ·There is mild impact load or overhang CNC shelf, machining center, milling
G2 machine, grinding machine, tapping
3. Heavy clearance in load and moment load. Rigidity and
center, drilling machine, hobbing ma-
(3) high precision are required.
large amount chine, various special equipment

Minus No preload, ultra-light preload,

·With smaller clearance than that of G1 larger-than-moderate preload, special
clearance in Gs
4. Special preload, light and precise operation is preload customized to user’s conditions,
small or large (4) required. special processing machine for heavy-
amount duty cutting

Note (1) No clearance or very small clearance.

(2) Very small minus clearance.
(3) Quiet large minus clearance to enhance rigidity
(4) Preload below G1 or over G2 to meet service conditions

Linear Motion Guide 17

A Linear Motion Guide

Table 5. Radial clearance of H & S & HS Series Unit : µm

Symbol
Model No. Moderate Light preload Heavy preload
No symbol G1 G2
H15 S15 - -4 ~ +2 -12 ~ -4 -
H20 S20 - -5 ~ +2 -14 ~ -5 -23 ~ -14
H25 S25 HS25 -6 ~ +3 -16 ~ -6 -26 ~ -16
H30 - HS30 -7 ~ +4 -19 ~ -7 -31 ~ -19
H35 - HS35 -8 ~ +4 -22 ~ -8 -35 ~ -22
H45 - HS45 -10 ~ +5 -25 ~ -10 -40 ~ -25
H55 - HS55 -12 ~ +5 -29 ~ -12 -46 ~ -29

Table 6. Radial clearance of HW Series Unit : µm

Symbol
Model No. Moderate Light preload Heavy
No symbol G1 G2
HW17 -3 ~ 0 -7 ~ -3 -
HW21 -4 ~ +2 -8 ~ -4 -
HW27 -5 ~ +2 -11 ~ -5 -
HW35 -8 ~ +4 -18 ~ -8 -28 ~ -18

Table 7. Radial clearance of M & MB Series Unit : µm

Symbol
Model No. Moderate Light preload
No symbol G1
M5 MB5 0 ~ +1.5 -1 ~ 0
M7 MB7 -2 ~ +2 -3 ~ 0
M9 MB9 -2 ~ +2 -4 ~ 0
M12 MB12 -3 ~ +3 -6 ~ 0
M15 MB13, MB15 -5 ~ +5 -10 ~ 0
M20 - -7 ~ +7 -14 ~ 0

Table 8. Radial clearance of R Series Unit : µm

Symbol
Model No. Moderate Light preload Heavy
No symbol G1 G2
R35 -2 ~ -1 -3 ~ -2 -5 ~ -3
R45 -2 ~ -1 -3 ~ -2 -5 ~ -3
R55 -2 ~ -1 -4 ~ -2 -6 ~ -4

18 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

5 Friction
1. Friction
Linear Motion guide’s friction resistance occurs to the level of 1/20~1/40 compared to existing sliding
guide since the rolling element (ball or roller) is assembled between the rail and the block which is the
raceway surface. Also starting torque is low because the difference between static friction and kinetic
friction is very small. Its low power loss and temperature rise in the part of linear motion are of advantage
to speedy operation. Its high conformability and response realize the highly precise positioning.

2. Friction Coefficient
Friction resistance of Linear Motion guide relies on the load applied to Linear Motion guide, speed,
lubrication or form. In case of light load or high-speedy motion, lubrication or seal is the main cause of
friction resistance. In case of heavy load or slow motion, the magnitude of load affects friction resistance.

F : Friction resistance (N)

4. Selection of Precision Class

Table 16. For the selection of precision class of Linear Motion guide by unit, please refer to the table below.
Precision class Preload
Application

Moderate High Precision Super precision Ultra precision Moderate Light preload Heavy preload
Unit
H P SP UP No
No sigh G1 G2
P6 P5 P4 P3 symbol
CNC shelf ● ● ● ●
Machining center ● ● ● ●
NC milling machine ● ● ● ●
CNC tapping machine ● ● ● ●
Machine Tool

NC boring machine ● ● ● ●
NC drilling machine ● ● ● ●
3D engraving machine ● ● ● ●
Jig boring machine ● ● ● ●
EDM electric spark machine ● ● ● ● ●
Grinding machine ● ● ● ●
Prober equipment ● ● ●
Wire bonder ● ● ● ●
Semiconductor equipment

Sliding machine ● ● ●
Dicing saw machine ● ● ●
IC test handler ● ● ●
PCB laser via-hole driller ● ●
PCB inspection equipment ● ● ●
Laser marker ● ●
Chip mounter ● ● ●
Mac/Mic inspection equipment ● ● ●
Pattern test system ● ● ●
Exposure ● ● ●
Laser repair ● ● ● ●
FPD

Lighting test equipment ● ● ●

Coder equipment ● ● ●
Chip bonding equipment ● ● ●
Dispenser equipment ● ● ●

24 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Precision class Preload
Application

Moderate High Precision Super precision Ultra precision Moderate Light preload Heavy preload
Unit
H P SP UP No
No sigh G1 G2
P6 P5 P4 P3 symbol
Scriber ● ● ●
Glass edge grinding machine ● ● ●
FPD measuring/test equipment ● ● ●
FPD

Laminating equipment ● ● ●
Indentation test equipment
Prober equipment
Punching press ● ●
Tire molder ● ●
Industrial machine

Tire valcanizer ● ●
Auto-shearing machine ● ●
Auto-welding machine ● ● ●
Conveyor ● ●
Textile machine ● ●
Injection molding machine ● ● ●
Cartesian coordinated robot ● ● ● ●
Gantry robot ● ● ●
LTR robot ● ● ●
Industrial robot

Take-out robot ● ●
Cylindrical coordinated robot ● ●
Vacuum robot ● ● ●
Robot carriage ● ●
Linear actuator ● ● ● ● ●
Office machine ● ●
FA transport system ● ●
Medical equipment ● ● ●
Welding machine ● ●
Others

Painting machine ● ●
Precision XY table ● ● ● ●
UVW stage ● ● ●
3D measuring machine ● ● ● ●

Linear Motion Guide 25

A Linear Motion Guide

7 Lubrication
1. Purpose
The purpose of lubricating Linear Motion guide is to create an oil film between rail, the raceway surface of block
and a rolling element to avoid the direct contact of metals and reduce friction and wear, preventing the raceway
surface and the rolling element from being overheated and melted to be adhered to each other.
Moreover, the oil film created between the raceway surface and a ball decreases load-induced contact
stress to improve the rolling contact fatigue life and prevent rust.
Linear Motion guide is equipped with seal but grease inside the block is leaking little by little during the opera-
tion. Therefore it is required to lubricate it at a time and interval appropriate to each service condition.

2. Selection of lubricant
To achieve the best performance of Linear Motion guide, you have to select the lubricant suitable for
service conditions.
Lubricants used for Linear Motion guide include grease and oil. You can select the lubricant and lubrica-
tion method that fit your service conditions, load, operating speed, assembly type, etc.

3. Grease lubrication
Grease is a semisolid lubricant consisting of base oil, thickener, and additives.
In case of using grease for Linear Motion guide, lithium soap grease is commonly used, but grease mixed with
extreme-pressure additive is used under high load or according to use. If you want to use Linear Motion guide
in a high-vacuum environment or a clean room, it’s desirable to choose grease with excellent performance in
low evaporation and low dust raise.

1) Refilling of grease
To refill grease to Linear Motion guide, supply a sufficient amount of grease through the nipple until remaining
grease is discharged. It is appropriate to fill grease up to 50% of the volume of the block. To reduce rolling resist-
ance which may increase after grease is filled, it is better to take a test run about 20 times prior to the operation.

2) Refill interval
If Linear Motion guide’s travel exceeds a certain time, its lubricating performance declines. So it is required to
refill an appropriate amount of grease at a proper time depending on service conditions and environment. Usu-
ally grease is to be filled when the travel distance reaches 100KM.

T : Oil refilling cycle (time)

Ve : Velocity (m/min)

26 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

4. Oil lubrication
In case of using oil for Linear Motion guide, it is recommended to use oil lubricant with high viscosity
(68mm2/sec) under higher load while oil lubricant with low-viscosity (13mm2/sec) at high velocity.
It is appropriate to refill 0.3cm3 of oil per hour for each one block.

Table 17. Inspection and refilling time of lubricant

Type Inspection item Inspection period Refiling time

• Status of mixing with cutting • Generally 1-2 times per year

• Usually more than once per year
chip, dust, foreign substance
Grease 3~6 months if travel exceeds 100km/year
• Status of contamination by
• Refill depending on the situation
other substances after checking the status of grease
• Refill depending on the results
Lubricant quantity, of inspection, and determine the
3~6 months
contamination, foreign substance optimal amount to refill depending
on the capacity of oil tank
Oil
• Refill an appropriate amount after
Check oil level
Before every identifying the consumption
(supply oil mist)
operation • Standardize the optimal amount
after identifying the consumption
※ Please do not use oil that may affect synthetic resin which is the material of Linear Motion guide units.

Table 18. Lubricants used for Linear Motion guide

Application Main use Product name Manufacturer Temp. in use (℃) Base oil Type of thickener
Common use Industrial machine, BW EP Mineral
(etreme-pressure BWC -20 ~ +105 Lithium
machine tool NO.2 oil
additive incl.)
Machine tool, electric spark GADUS Mineral
Common use SHELL -30 ~ +110 Lithium
machine, industrial robots, etc. S2 V220 00 oil
Clean & low Semiconductor, SNG 5050 NTG -40 ~ +1200 Syn-
Urea
dust raise FPD equipment DEMNUM DAIKIN -50 ~ +300 thetic oil
Semiconductor FOMBLIN AUSIMONT
Syn-
AMOLED process Krytox DuPont Ethylene
Eco-friendly -20 ~ +250 thetic
equipment, driving gear High vacuum Dow fluorinated
oil
in vacuum chamber grease Corning
Excellent in preventing rust and VACTRA No.2
Exxon Way oil
Machine tool oil film strength Suitable for ma-
chine tools because it is hardly SLC -20 ~ +100 Oil
Mobil Turbine oil
emulsified to clearance DTE Oil
Specialuse Corrosion proofing 6459 Grease SHELL -20 ~ +100 Mineral oil Polyurethane

Linear Motion Guide 27

A Linear Motion Guide

8 Surface Treatment
1. Surface Treatment
WON ST uses the following methods for the optimal treatment of surfaces of Linear Motion guide in order to
prevent rust and enhance appearance.

2. Types of Surface Treatment

1) Electrolytic rust-preventive black coating (black Cr plating)
This is an industrial black chrome coating which is used to improve the corrosion resistance at low cost. It can
achieve better corrosion resistance than martensite stainless steel and be used to enhance appearance and
prevent the reflection of light.
2) Industrial hard Cr plating
The film’s hardness is over 850HV so its wear resistance is excellent and the corrosion resistance is comparable with
that of martensite stainless steel.
WON ST offers surface treatments such as alkakine coloring or color alumite treatment if a customer requests. If you
want use Linear Motion Guide by treating its surface, you have to set the safety factor high.
3) Fluoride low-temperature Cr plating
It is also called “Raydent.” This is a combined surface treatment of black Cr coating with special fluoride resin coating which
is used in where corrosion resistance or low dust raise is needed - for instance clean room.

9 Dust Proof
1. Dust Proof
To make use of the characteristics and performance of Linear Motion guide, it is important to protect the unit from external
foreign substances which are likely to cause abnormal wear or shorten life. If dust or foreign substance is expected to be
mixed in, it is required to use the effective sealing or dust-proofing system.

2. Types of Dust Proof

WON Linear Motion guide is basically equipped with seal but if a customer request, a metal scraper can be
additionally mounted on the unit before shipment.
1) Exclusive seal
The block is equipped with end seals, side seals and inner seals to protect the bearing from foreign substances.
2) Metal scraper
A metal scraper is installed outside the end seals and effective in preventing foreign substances such as hot spatter
or slag created during a welding process from entering into the unit.

28 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

10 Measure to Use in Special Environment
WON Linear Motion guide is useful in various special applications if being used in accordance with service
conditions including material, surface treatment, dust proof, grease, etc.

Table 19.
Application Conditions of use Countermeasure
• For use in a clean environment
Lubricant
Clean • If used in a clean environ- • Use low dust raise grease
(clean room) ment, dust or particles gen- • Black Cr coating
- Semiconductor, FPD, erated in Linear Motion guide Rust • Fluoride low-temperature colorimetric Cr
medical equipment - should be minimized. plating (Raydent treatment)
prevention • Use high-corrosion resistant stainless
steel as material
• If used in a vacuum environment, out • Use grease for a vacuum
gas discharged from Linear Motion guide Lubricant environment
Vacuum should be tightly controlled to maintain the • Use high-corrosion resistant stainless
- Semiconductor, vacuum status. Rust steel as material
FPD deposition equipment – • Great rust prevention is required since prevention • Use a self oiling agent using special
rust-prone parts cannot be used in this coatings such as fluoroplastic coating
environment. (Out Gas)
• Use ceramic as material
• If used in higher temperature Lubricant • Use grease for high-temperat-
than general environment, the ure environments
High- material’s heat resistance is
• Use an end seal, side seal + double
temperature environment important and plastic synthetic seal
resin used for parts should be Material • Use a double seal
replaced with metal. • Use a special seal for high temperature
• Use a plastic synthetic resin cap
Seal • Use a metal cap
• If used in an environment • Use a metal scraper
filled with cutting chips, wood • Use a plastic synthetic resin cap
dust, and dust, it is required Cap • Use a metal cap
Dust
to develop a measure to • Use a seal plate
protect the block from foreign
substances. • Use an exclusive holding door
Holding
• Use an sealing all-in-one
door
holding oor

• If exposed to a spot welding Spatter • Fluoride black Cr coating

or arc welding environment, Seal • Use a metal scraper
Spatter
hot spatters may be fixed
onto the Dust • Use a metal cap
proof • Use a seal plate

Linear Motion Guide 29

A Linear Motion Guide

11 Placement and Installation

1. Placement and Structure
To place Linear Motion guide in the equipment, first identify the overall structure of the equipment, then check the size
of the base and a transfer table and consider load applied according to mounting directions such as placing vertically, in
slope, or in the back as well as required life to make sure Linear Motion guide is optimally installed.

Placement of Linear Motion guide (example)

(1) Assembly of the top side of block, block transfer (2) Assembly of the back side of block, rail transfer

(3) Assembly of the flank of block, block transfer (4) Assembly of the flank of block, rail transfer

(5)Assembly of the wall (6) Assembly of the wall (7) Symmetrical assembly (8) Symmetrical assembly
side of block, rail side of block, block of the top and bottom of of the top and bottom of
transfer transfer block, rail transfer block, block transfer

30 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

2. Mounting and Fixation
In the structure that vibration or impact is applied or where combined load or moment load is applied, Linear
Motion guide should be fixed in a different way from a general method.

As a widely used method, push a pressure plate Fasten a tapered fixture with a bolt. Even slight
from the flank after slightly protruding the block bolting up generates big force in a horizontal dir-
and rail of LM unit. ection. If it is bolted up too much, deformation
may occur in rail, for instance, which needs to be
taken a caution.

Figure 8. Pushing a pressure plate from the flank Figure 9. Pushing a tapered plate

Need to use miniature bolts due to space con- Push a needle roller with the head of a counter-
straint when pushing the rail and useful if having sunk screw using a roller of the bed.You must be
many bolts for pushing. careful to push it to fit the screw.

Figure 10. Pushing a bolt from the flank Figure 11. Pushing a roller

Linear Motion Guide 31

A Linear Motion Guide

3. Design of mounting surface during installation

Design and management of mounting surface
The precision of mounting surface of Linear Motion
guide and the error in installation generate unexpected
load and stress to the unit, therefore it is required to take
caution to prevent the harmful effects on the unit’s travel
and life.

Figure 12. Shape of edges

Management of vertical angle of datum plane for

installation
If the vertical angle of the installation surface and of a
rail or a block is inaccurate, it cannot be assembled
precisely. So you need to review the vertical angel and
error during design.

Figure 13.

Management of datum plane for assembly

It is important to manage the height and thickness of datum
plane during design.
If the height is too high or low, a rail or a block cannot be
assembled precisely due to its surface attachment. Or the
application of eccentric load, horizontal load and moment
load may loosen the strength of joint and result infaulty as-
sembly which will be unable to meet the precision require-
ments. So attention must be paid
Figure 14. Vertical angle of contact datum plane

Management of the shape of contact corner

If the right-angled corner of a rail or a block installed
to the mounting surface of Linear Motion guide is pro-
cessed in R-shape and R value is bigger than the di-
mension of the surface of the rail or the block, it may not
be assembled precisely to the datum plane. So atten-
tion must be paid.

Figure 15. Dimension of contact datum plane

32 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Management of dimensional tolerance between
datum plane and bolt during design
If the dimensional tolerance from the contact datum
plane to the mounting hole of a rail or a block of Linear
Motion guide is too big, precise assembly is impossible
so attention must be paid.
Generally the dimensional tolerance is ±0.1mm.
If the distance tolerance from the assembly datum
plane to the assembly bolt roll of a rail and a block is too
wide or narrow, precise assembly is impossible. So the Figure 16. Dimensional tolerance between
tolerance must be W3±0.1mm during design. contact datum plane and mounting hole

Assembly of rail datum plane Assembly of block datum plane

Figure 17. Height of the raised spot of mounting surface and radius of corner R
- Make a datum plane which can contact the flank in order to secure convenience in assembly of and precision position-
ing of a rail and a block during the installation of Linear Motion guide.
- The height of the raised spot of contact datum plane or the radius of corner may vary depending on the specifications of
Linear Motion guide so please see the table below.
- To prevent deformation of the raised spot by pressing force from above or pushing force from side, sufficient thickness
must be secured during design.

H Series, H-S Series, HS Series, HS-S Series Unit : mm

Model Radius of corner of the Radius of corner of the Height of raised spot of Height of raised spot of
No. installation to rail r1(max.) installation to block r2(max.) the installation to rail H1 the installation to block H2 H3
15 0.5 0.5 3 4 4.7
20 0.5 0.5 3.5 5 6
25 1 1 5 5 7
30 1 1 5 5 7.5
35 1 1 6 6 9
45 1 1 8 8 10
55 1.5 1.5 10 10 13

Linear Motion Guide 33

A Linear Motion Guide

HW Series Unit : mm

Model Radius of corner of the Radius of corner of the Height of raised spot of Height of raised spot of
No. installation to rail r1(max.) installation to block r2(max.) the installation to rail H1 the installation to block H2 H3
17 0.4 0.4 2 4 2.5
21 0.4 0.4 2.5 5 3.3
27 0.4 0.4 2.5 5 3.5
35 0.8 0.8 3.5 5 4

S Series, S-S Series Unit : mm

15 0.5 0.1 2.5 4 4.5

20 0.5 1 4 5 6
25 1 1 5 5 7

M Series, MB Series Unit : mm

5 0.2 0.2 0.8 2 1

7 0.2 0.2 1.2 2.5 1.5
9 0.2 0.2 1.5 3 2
12 0.2 0.2 2.5 4 3
13 0.2 0.2 3 4.5 4
15 0.2 0.2 3 4.5 4
20 0.2 0.2 4 5 5

R Series Unit : mm

35 1 1 5 6 6.5
45 1.5 1.5 6 8 8
55 1.5 1.5 8 10 10

34 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

4. Error tolerance of mounting surface during installation
1) Auto-adjusting and error-absorbing abilities
Linear Motion guide has an excellent auto-adjusting ability so that even though the structure to be assembled to
a rail is slightly deformed or processing error may occur, the straightness or parallelism of a table after assembly
will be better than the precision in processing before assembly and the quite straight-line running is available.
2) Error tolerance of the degree of parallelization when using 2-axis assembly (P1)
The error in the degree of parallelization when using a 2-axis assembly is as shown below.

Figure 18. Error tolerance of the degree of parallelization (P)

H Series, H-S Series, HS Series, HS-S Series Unit : µm

Model No. Common clearance G1 clearance G2 clearance

15 25 18 -
20 25 20 18
25 30 22 20
30 40 30 27
35 50 35 30
45 60 40 35
55 70 50 45

Linear Motion Guide 35

A Linear Motion Guide

HW Series Unit : µm

Model No. Common clearance G1 clearance G2 clearance

17 20 15 -
21 25 18 -
27 30 20 -
35 30 22 20

S Series, S-S Series Unit : µm

Model No. Common clearance G1 clearance G2 clearance

15 25 18 -
20 25 20 18
25 30 22 20

M Series, MB Series Unit : µm

Model No. Common clearance G1 clearance

5 2 -
7 3 -
9 4 3
12 9 5
13 10 6
15 10 6
20 13 8

R Series Unit : µm

Model No. Common clearance G1 clearance G2 clearance

35 14 10 7
45 17 13 9
55 21 14 11

36 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

3) Error tolerance of height during 2-axis assembly (P2)
If the error in height is too big, the block may be distorted and its rigidity may be affected as the
raceway groove of the block and the contact angle of a ball or a roller which is the rolling element
are altered.

The error tolerance of height level in using 2-axis Linear Motion guides is as follows.

Figure 19. Error tolerance of height level in 2-axis (X)

H Series, H-S Series, S Series, S-S Series, HS Series, HS-S Series Unit : µm

Model No. Common clearance G1 clearance G2 clearance

15 0.26L 0.17L -
20 0.26L 0.17L 0.10L
25 0.26L 0.17L 0.14L
30 0.34L 0.22L 0.18L
35 0.42L 0.30L 0.24L
45 0.50L 0.34L 0.28L
55 0.60L 0.42L 0.34L

Linear Motion Guide 37

A Linear Motion Guide

HW Series Unit : µm

Model No. Common clearance G1 clearance G2 clearance

17 0.13L 0.04L -
21 0.26L 0.17L -
27 0.26L 0.17L -
35 0.26L 0.17L 0.14L

M Series, MB Series Unit : µm

Model No. Common clearance G1 clearance

5 0.04L -
7 0.05L -
9 0.07L 0.01L
12 0.10L 0.02L
13 0.12L 0.04L
15 0.12L 0.04L
20 0.14L 0.06L

R Series Unit : µm

Model No. Common clearance G1 clearance G2 clearance

35, 45, 55 0.22L 0.17L 0.12L

5. Marking of datum plane during installation

The datum plane of WON ST’s Linear Motion guide is the ground surface on the opposite side of WON mark shown in the block.

Datum
plane

Mark of Mark of
WON ST WON ST
Datum Datum
plane plane

Figure 20. Linear Motion guide on the reference axis Figure 21. Linear Motion guide on the driven shaft

38 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

6. Connection of rails
If you need a longer rail than the one supplied, you can connect rails for the purpose of use. The
mark on the rail indicates the point where rails should be linked.
If the block passes through the connecting points simultaneously, they may affect the unit’s travel
and cause a delicate hitch. To solve this problem, it is recommended to make sure the connecting
points intercrossed

Connection of rails

Intercross connecting points

Figure 22. Connection of rails

Linear Motion Guide 39

A Linear Motion Guide

7. Installation of Linear Motion Guide

1. Installation of Linear Motion guide in the equipment exposed to vibration and impact

Table Block push bolt

Rail push bolt

Bed

Auxiliary axis Reference axis

1) Install a rail

Step 1: Check the surface to be installed with a rail Step 2: Draw a rail tightly to the datum plane
Prior to installation, thoroughly remove burr, Gently place Linear Motion guideon the bed
dust, rust preventive oil, etc. and push it in the opposite direction of the bed’s
datum plane

Push bolt

Step 3: Fasten bolts temporarily Step 4: Fasten push bolts

Check the status of bolts and fasten every Fix push bolts to make sure that the rail is parallel
bolt temporarily with the datum plane of the bed.

• Step 5 :
Fasten all bolts using the recommended torque.
Fasten the bolt in the center first and then contin-
ue fastening each bolt toward both ends in order
to maintain the precision of rail during assembly.

• Step 6 : Assemble an auxiliary axis

Repeat the procedure above for the installation
Step 5: Fix and fasten assembly bolts using a torque wrench
of an auxiliary axis.

40 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

2) Install a block

- Step 1: Assembly bolts temporarily

P
lace a table on the block and fasten all
bolts temporarily
- Step 2: Fasten bolts tightly
Fix the main rail block to the opposite side
of the table’s datum plane using a push bolt
and adjust the position of the table.
- Step 3: Fix and fasten assembly bolts
Completely fasten all bolts on the datum
plane and subsidiary side in the order of 1
to 2.
2. Installation of Linear Motion guide without a push bolt

Table

Push bolt
Bed

Auxiliary axis Reference axis

1) Install a master rail 2) Install an auxiliary rail

Straight edge

Use a vise Straight edge

Fasten bolts temporarily and push a master Place a straight edge between two rails and
rail toward the datum plane using a C-vise. make sure it is parallel with the master rail
Fasten the bolts according to the prescribed that is fixed temporarily.
torque and order. Check the degree of parallelism with the dial
gauge and adjust the rail if needed. Then,
fasten bolts in order.

Linear Motion Guide 41

A Linear Motion Guide

- Assembly using a table

Subsidiary side 1. Fix two blocks on the datum plane and one block on
the subsidiary side to a table.
2. Fix another auxiliary block and rail to the table and
bed temporarily.
3. Place a dial gauge on the table and make sure a
prober of the gauge contact the subsidiary side of
the block.
Master side
4. Separate the table from the end of the rail and
check the degree of parallelization of the block with
the auxiliary rail.
5. Fasten bolts in order.

- Assembly using a rail on the datum plane

1. Fix two blocks on the datum plane and one block on
the subsidiary side to a table.
2. Fix another auxiliary block and rail to the table and
Master side bed temporarily.
3. Separate the table from one rail and make an
adjustment by considering the rolling resistance
during the movement and checking the degree of
Subsidiary side parallelization of the auxiliary rail.
4. Fasten bolts in order.

Assembly using a jig Installation completion of Linear Motion guide

Move the position of a block in every bolt pitch at the end of
the rail in consecutive order and fasten bolts in order by ad-
justing the degree of parallelism between the datum plane of
a reference rail and that of an auxiliary rail using a special jig.

42 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

3. Installation of Linear Motion guide without the datum plane for a reference rail

Table

Push bolt
Bed

Subsidiary side Datum plane

1) Install a reference rail

Measuring
plate Straight edge

Use a temporary datum plane Use a straight edge

Fix two blocks together onto the measuring Fix a rail to the bed temporarily and adjust it to
plate and install the temporary datum plane be straight using a dial gauge and then fasten
near the surface where a rail is to be installed bolts in order.
on the bed. Then check and adjust the de-
gree of parallelism of the rail and fasten bolts
in order.

2) Apply the same method when installing the auxiliary block and rail

4. Measure precision after installation

You can check the precision of travel by fixing two blocks onto the measuring plate. Use a dial gauge with a
straight edge or a laser interferometer to measure the precision.
In case of using a dial gauge, you have to place the straight edge as close to the block as possible in order to
accurately measure it.

Measure using a laser interferometer Measure using a dial gauge with a straight edge

Linear Motion Guide 43

A Linear Motion Guide

8. Torque used to fasten bolts during the assembly of Linear Motion guide
1) Select the optimal torque for bolts
For the assembly of the rail of Linear Motion guide, the optimal clamping torque must be used depend-
ing on the materials of mounting surface or bolts. Inaccurate clamping torque may affect the mounting
precision of the rail so please use a torque wrench.

2) Recommended torques by the material of mounting base of Linear Motion guide Unit : N•m

Torque value (Unit : N·m)

Bolt specification
Steel Casting Aluminum
M3 2 1.3 1
M4 4 2.7 2
M5 8.8 5.9 4.4
M6 13.7 9.2 6.8
M8 30 20 15
M10 68 45 33
M12 120 78 58
M14 157 105 78
M16 196 131 98
M20 382 255 191

3) Recommended torques by the material of bolts Unit : N•m

Bolt Clamping torque Bolt Clamping torque

specification Carbon steel bolt SCM steel bolt specification Carbon steel bolt SCM steel bolt
M2.3 - 0.4 M12 108 76
M2.5 - 0.6 M14 172 122
M3 1.7 1.1 M16 263 196
M4 4.0 2.5 M18 - 265
M5 7.9 5.1 M20 512 -
M6 13.3 8.6 M22 - 520
M8 32.0 22.0 M24 882 -
M10 62.7 43.0 M30 1750 -

44 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

9. Directions of bolt fastening by Linear Motion guide type
H-F, H-FL, H-SF, H-SFL
Since the flange of a block is tapped and the counter bore is pro-
cessed in the bottom, bolts can be assembled both from bottom
to top and from top to bottom as indicated by arrows.
But, if bolts are fastened from bottom to top, it is recommended to
use one size smaller bolts.
H-R, H-RL, H-SR, H-SRL

Since tap is processed in the square body of the block, it is

used when bolts are fastened from top to bottom as indicated by
arrows.

S-C, S-R, S-SC, S-SR

Since tap is processed in the rectangular body of the block, it is

used when bolts are fastened from top to bottom as indicated by
arrows.

S-CF, S-F, S-SCF, S-SF

Since the flange of a block is tapped and the counter bore is pro-
cessed in the bottom, bolts can be assembled both from bottom
to top and from top to bottom as indicated by arrows.
But, if bolts are fastened from bottom to top, it is recommended to
use one size smaller bolts.
R-F, R-FL
Since the flange of a block is tapped and the counter bore is pro-
cessed in the bottom, bolts can be assembled both from bottom
to top and from top to bottom as indicated by arrows.
But, if bolts are fastened from bottom to top, it is recommended to
use one size smaller bolts.
R-R, R-RL

Since the rectangular body of a block is tapped, it is used when

bolts are fastened from top to bottom as indicated by arrows

Linear Motion Guide 45

A Linear Motion Guide

12 Types of Linear Motion Guide

1. Linear Motion Guide H Series
1) Structure of H Series
WON Linear Motion Guide H Series has a four-row circular arc-groove structure in the raceway groove
of a rail or a block and is a 4-direction equal load type which can bear equal load rating for vertical
compression load, tensile load, and horizontal load as the rolling element is combined with balls at 45
degree, which reduces friction resistance to ensure smooth motion and long life.
Also if the ball is preloaded, it can enhance the rigidity of Linear Motion guide and minimize Linear Mo-
tion guide’s displacement for external load.

2) Features of H Series
a. High quality and very effective in realizing high precision and elimination of labor
b. High rigidity and high precision which can realize the stable travel for a longtime
c. Great wear resistance and friction resistance which ensures a long life
d. Great auto-adjusting and error-absorbing abilities with the face-to-face duplex structure same to D/F
combination of ball bearing
e. Various specifications for easy design
f. Easy to use due to great compatibility between a rail and a block

2. Spacer Chain Guide H-S Series

1) Structure of H-S Series
Linear Motion Guide H-S Series has a 4-direction equal load type which is identical to H Series and has
an auto-adjusting face-to-face D/F structure. It uses balls as a rolling element and combines a spacer
between balls to prevent them from colliding each other during the rolling motion. Therefore it makes
less noise and more stable circulating motion than a full-ball type to realize quiet running and the spacer
act as the pocket of lubricant to obtain longer life than H Series.

2) Features of H-S Series

a. As a spacer-incorporated type which improves frictional properties and prevents the collision of balls,
it not only allows stable circulating motion and smooth running but also reduces noise. If special lubric
ating seal is attached to lengthen life, maintenance-free operations can be achieved.
b. Collision between balls and the loss of oil film are prevented by applying a resin spacer to improve life
and generate less particles and dust.
c. H igh quality in realizing high precision and high velocity so it could create large effect on elimination
of power loss.
d. High rigidity and high precision which can realize the stable travel for a long time
e. Great wear resistance and friction resistance which ensures a long life
f. G
reat auto-adjusting and error-absorbing abilities with the face-to-face duplex structure same to D/F
combination of ball bearing
g. Various specifications for easy design
h. Easy to use due to great compatibility between a rail and a block

46 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

H Series (Full-ball Type) H-S Series (Spacer Chain Type)

Spacer Ball Chain

Cross Section Detail of Raceway of H-S Series

Moment Rigidity Radial Rigidity

Linear Motion Guide 47

A Linear Motion Guide

Types and Features

Category Type Shape & Features
- With the tapped flange of a
block, a general type which can
be assembled both from bottom
to top and from top to bottom Machine tool X,
H-F - A 4-direction equal load type with
high rigidity and high load Y, Z axis,
H-SF CNC machining
S Series is a low-noise low-dust
raise type with improved life due center,
to zero friction between balls CNC shelf,
since a spacer retainer is applied. CNC tapping
Flange
type center,
-H aving the cross section identical to
that of H-F Series, it increased load Electric injection
rating by extending the whole length machine,
(L 1) of Linear Motion guide block
H-FL - A 4-direction equal load type with 3D engraving
high rigidity and high load machine,
H-SFL
S Series is a low-noise low-dust laser processer,
raise type with improved life due milling machine,
to zero friction between balls
since a spacer retainer is applied. welder for exclus-
ive use,
- With the tapped top side of a EDM electric
block, a compact type that the
width of Linear Motion guide spark machine,
block is minimized automation
H-R - A 4-direction equal load type with
high rigidity and high load device,
H-SR Various transport
S Series is a low-noise low-dust
raise type with improved life due system,
to zero friction between balls FPD inspection
since a spacer retainer is applied. equipment,
Compact
type Industrial robots,
-H aving the cross section identical to
that of H-R Series, it increased load rat- ATC,
ing by extending the whole length Precision X-Y
(L 1) of Linear Motion guide block
H-RL - A 4-direction equal load type with table,
high rigidity and high load Various industrial
H-SRL
S Series is a low-noise low-dust machine
raise type with improved life due
to zero friction between balls
since a spacer retainer is applied.

48 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Standard and maximum length of a rail

Unit : mm
Model No. H15 H20 H25 H30 H35 H45 H55
160 160 220 280 440 570 780
220 220 280 360 520 675 900
280 280 340 440 600 780 1020
340 400 520 680 885
Standard 1360 460 600 760 2820
length 1480 1960 2880 2940
1600 2080 2200 2520 2680 2985 3060
2200 2320 2680 2840 3090
2440 2840 3000
3000
Standard pitch P 60 60 60 80 80 105 120
G 20 20 20 20 20 22.5 30
Max. length 4000

Standard tap hole type of a rail

Model No. S h(mm)

H15 M5 8
H20 M6 10
H25 M6 12
H30 M8 15
H35 M8 17
H45 M12 24
H55 M14 24

Linear Motion Guide 49

A Linear Motion Guide

H-F Series, H-FL Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length B C M L1 t T T1 N E Grease H3
H W L nipple

Composition of Model No.

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Full-ball type / S–Spacer Chain type
Form of block : R–Rectangular standard type / RL–Rectangular long type / F–Flange standard type / FL–Flange long type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / SS–End seal + Inside seal / ZZ–End seal + Inside seal + metal scraper
UULF-End seal + LF seal / SSLF- End seal + Inside seal + LF seal / ZZLF - End seal + Inside seal + metal scraper + LF seal (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload / G2–Heavy preload / Gs–Special preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision / SP–Super Precision / UP–Ultra Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly) / A– Rail tap hole type (an underside assembly) (*4)
Connection symbol
Special symbol (*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
Number of axis used on the same surface (*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class (*4) See P49 Standard tap hole type of a rail

50 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

12.6
14.3
18.3
21.8 30.7 0.370 1.692 0.370 1.692
27.0
32.8
50.4
60.3
67.0
80.2
108.5 116.4 2.860 9.912 2.860 9.912 2.275
129.7 150.1 4.533 16.161 4.533 16.161 2.935
155.9 161.5 4.654 16.016 4.654 16.016 3.779
187.5 210.1 7.468 26.493 7.468 26.493 4.916

Linear Motion Guide 51

A Linear Motion Guide

H-R Series, H-RL Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length Grease
B C Mxℓ L1 T N E H3
H W L nipple

Composition of Model No.

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

52 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

12.6
14.3
18.3
21.8 30.7 0.370 1.692 0.370 1.692
27.0
32.8
50.4
60.3
67.0
80.2 96.2 1.797 8.172 1.797 8.172 1.674
108.5 116.4 2.860 9.912 2.860 9.912 2.275
129.7 150.1 4.533 16.161 4.533 16.161 2.935
155.9 161.5 4.654 16.016 4.654 16.016 3.779
187.5 210.1 7.468 26.493 7.468 26.493 4.916

Linear Motion Guide 53

A Linear Motion Guide

H-SF Series, H-SFL Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length Grease H3
B C M L1 t T T1 N E
H W L nipple
H 15SF 24 47 57 38 30 M5 40.7 - 7 11 6 6 A-M4 4.5
H 15SFL 24 47 65.3 38 30 M5 49.1 - 7 11 6 6 A-M4 4.5
H 20SF 30 63 72.7 53 40 M6 53.1 - 9.2 10 7.5 12 B-M6F 6
H 20SFL 30 63 88.6 53 40 M6 69 - 9.2 10 7.5 12 B-M6F 6
H 25SF 36 70 83 57 45 M8 58.3 - 11.5 16 9 12 B-M6F 7
H 25SFL 36 70 102.9 57 45 M8 78.2 - 11.5 16 9 12 B-M6F 7
H 30SF 42 90 97.8 72 52 M10 70.8 - 9.5 18 7.3 12 B-M6F 7.5
H 30SFL 42 90 120 72 52 M10 93 - 9.5 18 7.3 12 B-M6F 7.5
H 35SF 48 100 110 82 62 M10 80.8 - 12.5 21 8 12 B-M6F 9
H 35SFL 48 100 135.4 82 62 M10 106.2 - 12.5 21 8 12 B-M6F 9
H 45SF 60 120 138.5 100 80 M12 106 25 13 18 10.5 13 B-PT1/8 10
H 45SFL 60 120 170.2 100 80 M12 137.8 25 13 18 10.5 13 B-PT1/8 13
H 55SF 70 140 171 116 95 M14 132.6 29 19 21 11 13 B-PT1/8 13
H 55SFL 70 140 210.6 116 95 M14 172.2 29 19 21 11 13 B-PT1/8 13

Composition of Model No.

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Full-ball type / S–Spacer Chain type
Form of block : R–Rectangular standard type / RL–Rectangular long type / F–Flange standard type / FL–Flange long type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / SS–End seal + Inside seal / ZZ–End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper
UULF-End seal + LF seal / SSLF- End seal + Inside seal + LF seal / ZZLF - End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper + LF seal (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload / G2–Heavy preload / Gs–Special preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision / SP–Super Precision / UP–Ultra Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly) / A– Rail tap hole type (an underside assembly) (*4)
Connection symbol
Special symbol (*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
Number of axis used on the same surface (*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class (*4) See P49 Standard tap hole type of a rail

54 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Dimensions of Rail Basic load rating Static allowance morment kN·m Mass

Width Mp My Mr
W2 Heigh Value Pitch Block Rail
C Co
W1 d1 x d2 x h
H1 G P kN kN kg kg/m
±0.05 1 2(Contact) 1 2(Contact) 1
15 16 13 20 60 4.5X7.5X5.3 12.1 16.2 0.115 0.552 0.115 0.552 0.129 0.19 1.3
15 16 13 20 60 4.5X7.5X5.3 13.7 19.3 0.165 0.769 0.165 0.769 0.154 0.24 1.3
20 21.5 16.5 20 60 6X9.5X8.5 17.6 23.9 0.221 1.049 0.221 1.049 0.251 0.41 2.2
20 21.5 16.5 20 60 6X9.5X8.5 21.1 30.7 0.370 1.692 0.370 1.692 0.322 0.54 2.2
23 23.5 20 20 60 7X11X9 25.8 33.1 0.337 1.636 0.337 1.636 0.398 0.61 3.0
23 23.5 20 20 60 7X11X9 31.7 43.6 0.596 2.760 0.596 2.760 0.525 0.82 3.0
28 31 26 20 80 9x14x12 48 57.1 0.711 3.384 0.711 3.384 0.828 1.1 4.85
28 31 26 20 80 9x14x12 58 73.6 1.203 5.506 1.203 5.506 1.067 1.3 4.85
34 33 29 20 80 9x14x12 63.7 74.6 1.062 5.012 1.062 5.012 1.298 1.6 6.58
34 33 29 20 80 9x14x12 77.1 96.2 1.797 8.172 1.797 8.172 1.674 2.01 6.58
45 37.5 32 22.5 105 14x20x17 82.9 95.5 1.789 8.251 1.789 8.251 1.992 3.15 9.75
45 37.5 32 22.5 105 14x20x17 99.7 122.5 2.984 13.341 2.984 13.341 2.556 4.07 9.75
53 43.5 38 30 120 16x23x20 133.5 149.2 3.495 16.007 3.495 16.007 3.608 5.30 13.75
53 43.5 38 30 120 16x23x20 160.4 191.4 5.826 25.899 5.826 25.899 4.627 6.84 13.75
1N≒0.102kgf

Linear Motion Guide 55

A Linear Motion Guide

H-SR Series, H-SRL Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length Grease H3
B C MXℓ L1 T N E
H W L nipple
H 15SR 28 34 57 26 26 M4 x 5 40.7 6 10 6 A-M4 4.5
H 15SRL 28 34 65.3 26 26 M4 x 5 49.1 6 10 6 A-M4 4.5
H 20SR 30 44 72.7 32 36 M5 x 6 53.1 8 7.5 12 B-M6F 6
H 20SRL 30 44 88.6 32 50 M5 x 6 69 8 7.5 12 B-M6F 6
H 25SR 40 48 83 35 35 M6 x 8 58.3 8 13 12 B-M6F 7
H 25SRL 40 48 102.9 35 50 M6 x 8 78.2 8 13 12 B-M6F 7
H 30SR 45 60 97.8 40 40 M8 x 10 70.8 8 10.3 12 B-M6F 7.5
H 30SRL 45 60 120 40 60 M8 x 10 93 8 10.3 12 B-M6F 7.5
H 35SR 55 70 110 50 50 M8 x 12 80.8 10 15 12 B-M6F 9
H 35SRL 55 70 135.4 50 72 M8 x 12 106.2 10 15 12 B-M6F 9
H 45SR 70 86 138.5 60 60 M10 x 17 106 15 20.5 13 B-PT1/8 10
H 45SRL 70 86 170.2 60 80 M10 x 17 137.8 15 20.5 13 B-PT1/8 10
H 55SR 80 100 171 75 75 M12 x 18 132.6 20 21 13 B-PT1/8 13
H 55SRL 80 100 210.6 75 95 M12 x 18 172.2 20 21 13 B-PT1/8 13

Composition of Model No.

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Full-ball type / S–Spacer Chain type
Form of block : R–Rectangular standard type / RL–Rectangular long type / F–Flange standard type / FL–Flange long type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / SS–End seal + Inside seal / ZZ–End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper
UULF-End seal + LF seal / SSLF- End seal + Inside seal + LF seal / ZZLF - End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper + LF seal (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload / G2–Heavy preload / Gs–Special preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision / SP–Super Precision / UP–Ultra Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly) / A– Rail tap hole type (an underside assembly) (*4)
Connection symbol
Special symbol (*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
Number of axis used on the same surface (*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class (*4) See P49 Standard tap hole type of a rail

56 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Dimensions of Rail Basic load rating Static allowance morment kN·m Mass

Width Heigh Value Pitch C Co Mp My Mr Block Rail

W1 W2 H1 G P
d1 x d2 x h kN kN kg kg/m
±0.05 1 2(Contact) 1 2(Contact) 1
15 9.5 13 20 60 4.5X7.5X5.3 12.1 16.2 0.115 0.552 0.115 0.552 0.129 0.18 1.3
15 9.5 13 20 60 4.5X7.5X5.3 13.7 19.3 0.165 0.769 0.165 0.769 0.154 0.23 1.3
20 12 16.5 20 60 6X9.5X8.5 17.6 23.9 0.221 1.049 0.221 1.049 0.251 0.31 2.2
20 12 16.5 20 60 6X9.5X8.5 21.1 30.7 0.370 1.692 0.370 1.692 0.322 0.41 2.2
23 12.5 20 20 60 7X11X9 25.8 33.1 0.337 1.636 0.337 1.636 0.398 0.53 3.0
23 12.5 20 20 60 7X11X9 31.7 43.6 0.596 2.760 0.596 2.760 0.525 0.71 3.0
28 16 26 20 80 9x14x12 48 57.1 0.711 3.384 0.711 3.384 0.828 0.9 4.85
28 16 26 20 80 9x14x12 58 73.6 1.203 5.506 1.203 5.506 1.067 1.1 4.85
34 18 29 20 80 9x14x12 63.7 74.6 1.062 5.012 1.062 5.012 1.298 1.5 6.58
34 18 29 20 80 9x14x12 77.1 96.2 1.797 8.172 1.797 8.172 1.674 2.01 6.58
45 20.5 32 22.5 105 14x20x17 82.9 95.5 1.789 8.251 1.789 8.251 1.992 3.20 9.75
45 20.5 32 22.5 105 14x20x17 99.7 122.5 2.984 13.341 2.984 13.341 2.556 4.10 9.75
53 23.5 38 30 120 16x23x20 133.5 149.2 3.495 16.007 3.495 16.007 3.608 5.16 13.75
53 23.5 38 30 120 16x23x20 160.4 191.4 5.826 25.899 5.826 25.899 4.627 6.61 13.75
1N≒0.102kgf

Linear Motion Guide 57

A Linear Motion Guide

3. Wide Linear Motion Guide HW Series

HW Series (Full-ball Type)

Cross Section

Moment Rigidity Radial Rigidity

58 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Standard tap hole type of a rail

Unit : mm
Model No. HW17 HW21 HW27 HW35
110 130 160 280
230 230 280 440
350 380 340 680
470 430 460 840
Standard
550 580 520 1000
length
630 630 640 1240
780 700 1480
820 1640
1800
Standard pitch P 40 50 60 80
G 15 15 20 20
Max. length 2000 3000

Linear Motion Guide 59

A Linear Motion Guide

HW-F Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length B C M L1 T N E Grease H3
H W L nipple
HW17F 17 60 51 53 26 M4 37.4 6 4 3.5 A-Ø3 2.5
HW21F 21 68 59 60 29 M5 45.4 8 5 3.5 A-Ø3 3.3
HW27F 27 80 72.5 70 40 M6 54.7 10 6 10.3 B-M6F 3.5
HW35F 35 120 105.3 107 60 M8 82.1 14 7.6 10.3 B-M6F 4

Composition of Model No.

HW17 F UU

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Full-ball type
Form of block : F–Flange standard type / R–Rectangular standard type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / SS–End seal + Inside seal / ZZ–End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload / G2–Heavy preload / Gs–Special preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision / SP–Super Precision / UP–Ultra Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly)
Connection symbol
Special symbol (*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
Number of axis used on the same surface (*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class

60 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Dimensions of Rail Basic load rating Static allowance morment kN·m Mass
Width Mp My Mr
W3 Heigh Value Pitch d1 x d2 x h Block Rail
W1 C Co
W2
0 H1 G P kN kN 1 2(Contact) 1 2(Contact) 1 kg kg/m
-0.05

33 13.5 18 8.6 15 40 4.5x7.5x5.3 7.3 12.2 0.081 0.381 0.081 0.381 0.205 0.15 1.9
37 15.5 22 11 15 50 4.5x7.5x5.3 8.4 14.8 0.119 0.547 0.119 0.547 0.278 0.24 2.9
42 19 24 15 20 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 15.3 24.8 0.239 1.114 0.239 1.114 0.527 0.47 4.5
69 25.5 40 19 20 80 7x11x9 33.9 53.2 0.773 3.528 0.773 3.528 1.851 1.40 9.6
1N≒0.102kgf

Linear Motion Guide 61

A Linear Motion Guide

HW-R Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length B C MXℓ L1 T N E Grease H3
H W L nipple
HW17R 17 50 51 29 15 M4 X 5 37.4 5.2 4 3.5 A-Ø3 2.5
HW21R 21 54 59 31 19 M5 X 6 45.4 8 5 3.5 A-Ø3 3.3
HW27R 27 62 72.5 46 32 M6 X 6 54.7 10 6 10.3 B-M6F 3.5
HW35R 35 100 105.3 76 50 M8 X 8 82.1 14 7.6 10.3 B-M6F 4

Composition of Model No.

HW17 R UU

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

62 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Dimensions of Rail Basic load rating Static allowance morment kN·m Mass
Width Mp My Mr
W1 W2 W3 Heigh Value Pitch d1 x d2 x h C Co
2(Con- 2(Con-
Block Rail
0 H1 G P kN kN 1 1 1 kg kg/m
-0.05 tact) tact)
33 8.5 18 8.6 15 40 4.5x7.5x5.3 7.3 12.2 0.081 0.381 0.081 0.381 0.205 0.13 1.9
37 8.5 22 11 15 50 4.5x7.5x5.3 8.4 14.8 0.119 0.547 0.119 0.547 0.278 0.19 2.9
42 10 24 15 20 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 15.3 24.8 0.239 1.114 0.239 1.114 0.527 0.36 4.5
69 15.5 40 19 20 80 7x11x9 33.9 53.2 0.773 3.528 0.773 3.528 1.851 1.20 9.6
1N≒0.102kgf

Linear Motion Guide 63

A Linear Motion Guide

4. Slim Linear Motion Guide S Series

1) Structure of S Series
Linear Motion Guide S Series has a four-row circular arc-groove structure and is a 4-direction equal load type.
It also has an auto-adjusting face-to-face D/F structure. It uses balls as a rolling element and is a slim-type
guide with a low sectional height as well as high rigidity and less noise.

2) Features of S Series
a. High quality and very effective in realizing high precision and elimination of labor
b. High rigidity and high precision which can realize the stable travel for a long time
c. Great wear resistance and friction resistance which ensures a long life
d. Great auto-adjusting and error-absorbing abilities with the face-to-face duplex structure same to D/F com-
bination of ball bearing
e. Various specifications for easy design
f. Easy to use due to great compatibility between a rail and a block
g. 4-direction equal load and high-rigidity structure
h. Slim shape suitable for horizontal motion to ensure stable running

5. Slim Spacer Chain Linear Motion Guide S-S Series

1) Structure of S Series
Linear Motion Guide S-S Series has a 4-direction equal load type which is identical to S Series and has an
auto-adjusting face-to-face D/F structure.
It uses balls as a rolling element and combines a spacer between balls to prevent them from colliding each
other during the rolling motion.
Therefore it makes less noise and more stable circulating motion than a full-ball type to realize quiet running
even in high velocity movement and the spacer act as the pocket of lubr icant to obtain longer life than H
Series.
2) Features of S-S Series
a. As a spacer-incorporated type which improves frictional properties and prevents the collision of balls, it not
only allows stable circulating motion and smooth running but also reduces noise. If special lubricating seal
is attached to lengthen life, maintenance-free operations can be achieved.
b. Collision between balls and the loss of oil film are preveted by applying a resin spacer to improve life and
generate less particles and dust.
c. High quality in realizing high precision and high velocity so it could create large effec on elimination of
power loss.
d. High rigidity and high precision which can realize the stable travel for a long time
e. Great wear resistance and friction resistance which ensures a long life
f.Great auto-adjusting and error-absorbing abilities with the face-to-face duplex structure same to D/F combi
nation of ball bearing
g. Various specifications for easy design
h. Easy to use due to great compatibility between a rail and a block

64 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Slim Linear Motion Guide S, S-S Series

S Series (Full-ball Type) S-S Series (Spacer Chain Type)

Spacer Ball Chain

Cross Section Detail of Raceway of S-S Series

Moment Rigidity Radial Rigidity

Linear Motion Guide 65

A Linear Motion Guide

Types and Features

Category Type Shape & Features
-W ith the tapped flange of a block,
a slim compact that the width and
length of Linear Motion guide
block is minimized
S-C - A 4-direction equal load type with
45° contact angle
S-SC S Series is a low-noise low- Cartesian coordi-
dust raise type with improved
life due to zero friction between
nated robot,
balls since a spacer chain is linear actuator,
applied. automation
Compact
type system,
-H aving the cross section identical to
that of S-C Series, a slim compact semiconductor/
type that the width and length of Lin- display manufac-
ear Motion guide block is minimized
S-R - A 4-direction equal load type with turing system,
45° contact angle LED inspection
S-SR S Series is a low-noise low-
dust raise type with improved equipment,
life due to zero friction between dispenser equip-
balls since a spacer chain is
applied. ment,
medical Equip-
- With the tapped flange of a ment,
block, a slim compact type that
the width and length of Linear high-speed trans-
Motion guide block is minimized port system,
S-CF - A 4-direction equal load type with
45° contact angle woodworking
S-SCF S Series is a low-noise low- machine,
dust raise type with improved
life due to zero friction between take-out robots,
balls since a spacer chain is small machine
applied. tool,
Flange
type - Having the cross section identi- laser processor,
cal to that of S-CF Series, a slim
compact type that the width and precision
length of Linear Motion guide measurement
block is minimized equipment
S-F - A 4-direction equal load type with
S-SF 45° contact angle
S Series is a low-noise low-
dust raise type with improved
life due to zero friction between
balls since a spacer chain is
applied.

66 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Standard tap hole type of a rail

Unit : mm
Model No. S15 S20 S25
160 160 220
220 220 280
280 280 340
340 400
Standard
1360 460
length
1480 1960
1600 2080 2200
2200 2320
2440
Standard pitch P 60 60 60
G 20 20 20
Max. length 4000

Standard tap hole type of a rail

Unit : mm
Model No. S h(mm)
S15 M5 8
S20 M6 10
S25 M6 12

Linear Motion Guide 67

A Linear Motion Guide

S-C Series, S-R Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length Grease
B C Mxℓ L1 T N E H3
H W L nipple

Composition of Model No.

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Full-ball type / S–Spacer Chain type
Form of block : C–Rectangular short type / R–Rectangular standard type / CF–Flange short type / F–Flange standard type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / SS–End seal + Inside seal / ZZ–End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper
UULF-End seal + LF seal / SSLF- End seal + Inside seal + LF seal / ZZLF - End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper + LF seal (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload / G2–Heavy preload / Gs–Special preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision / SP–Super Precision / UP–Ultra Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly) / A– Rail tap hole type (an underside assembly)(*4)
Connection symbol
Special symbol
Number of axis used on the same surface
(*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
(*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class (*4) See P67 The reference for standard tap hole type of a rail

68 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Linear Motion Guide 69

A Linear Motion Guide

S-CF Series, S-F Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length Grease
B C Mxℓ L1 T T1 N E H3
H W L nipple

Composition of Model No.

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Full-ball type / S–Spacer Chain type
Form of block : C–Rectangular short type / R–Rectangular standard type / CF–Flange short type / F–Flange standard type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / SS–End seal + Inside seal / ZZ–End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper
UULF-End seal + LF seal / SSLF- End seal + Inside seal + LF seal / ZZLF - End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper + LF seal (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload / G2–Heavy preload / Gs–Special preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision / SP–Super Precision / UP–Ultra Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly) / A– Rail tap hole type (an underside assembly) (*4)
Connection symbol
Special symbol
Number of axis used on the same surface
(*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
(*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class (*4) See P67 The reference for standard tap hole type of a rail

70 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Dimensions of Rail Basic load rating Static allowance moment kN·m Mass
Width Heigh Value Pitch C Co Mp My Mr Block Rail
W1 W2 d1 x d2 x h kN kN kg kg/m
±0.05 H1 G P 1 2(contact) 1 2(contact) 1
9.0 10.0 0.042 0.224 0.042 0.224 0.079
12.6 16.2 0.115 0.552 0.115 0.552 0.129
12.0 13.1 0.063 0.342 0.063 0.342 0.137
16.8 21.2 0.173 0.838 0.173 0.838 0.223
19.2 20.4 0.123 0.670 0.123 0.670 0.246
27.0 33.1 0.337 1.636 0.337 1.636 0.398

Linear Motion Guide 71

A Linear Motion Guide

S-SC Series, S-SR Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length B C MXℓ L1 T N E Grease H3
H W L nipple
S 15SC 40.2 - 24
24 34 26 M4 x 6 6 6 6 A-M4 4.5
S 15SR 56.9 26 40.7
S 20SC 47.2 - 27.6
28 42 32 M5 x 7 7.5 5.5 12 B-M6F 6
S 20SR 66.3 32 46.7
S 25SC 59.1 - 34.4
33 48 35 M6 x 9 8 6 12 B-M6F 7
S 25SR 83 35 58.3

Composition of Model No.

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Full-ball type / S–Spacer Chain type
Form of block : C–Rectangular short type / R–Rectangular standard type / CF–Flange short type / F–Flange standard type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / SS–End seal + Inside seal / ZZ–End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper
UULF-End seal + LF seal / SSLF- End seal + Inside seal + LF seal / ZZLF - End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper + LF seal (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload / G2–Heavy preload / Gs–Special preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision / SP–Super Precision / UP–Ultra Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly) / A– Rail tap hole type (an underside assembly) (*4)
Connection symbol
Special symbol
Number of axis used on the same surface
(*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
(*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class (*4) See P67 The reference for standard tap hole type of a rail

72 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Dimensions of Rail Basic load rating Static allowance morment kN·m Mass
Width Mp My Mr
W2 Heigh Value Pitch Block Rail
C Co
W1 d1 x d2 x h
±0.05
H1 G P kN kN 1 2(Contact) 1 2(Contact) 1 kg kg/m

8.3 10 0.042 0.224 0.042 0.224 0.079 0.096

15 9.5 13 20 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 1.3
12.1 16.2 0.115 0.552 0.115 0.552 0.129 0.156
11.1 13.1 0.063 0.342 0.063 0.342 0.137 0.153
20 11 16.5 20 60 6x9.5x8.5 2.2
16.1 21.2 0.173 0.838 0.173 0.838 0.223 0.246
17.9 20.4 0.123 0.670 0.123 0.670 0.246 0.254
23 12.5 20 20 60 7x11x9 3.0
25.8 33.1 0.337 1.636 0.337 1.636 0.398 0.413
1N≒0.102kgf

Linear Motion Guide 73

A Linear Motion Guide

S-SCF Series, S-SF Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length B C M L1 T T1 N E Grease H3
H W L nipple
S 15SCF 40.2 - 24
24 52 41 M5 6 7 6 6 A-M4 4.5
S 15SF 56.9 26 40.7
S 20SCF 47.2 - 27.6
28 59 49 M6 8 9 5.5 12 B-M6F 6
S 20SF 66.3 32 46.7
S 25SCF 59.1 - 34.4
33 73 60 M8 9 10 6 12 B-M6F 7
S 25SF 83 35 58.3

Composition of Model No.

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Full-ball type / S–Spacer Chain type
Form of block : C–Rectangular short type / R–Rectangular standard type / CF–Flange short type / F–Flange standard type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / SS–End seal + Inside seal / ZZ–End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper
UULF-End seal + LF seal / SSLF- End seal + Inside seal + LF seal / ZZLF - End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper + LF seal (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload / G2–Heavy preload / Gs–Special preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision / SP–Super Precision / UP–Ultra Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly) / A– Rail tap hole type (an underside assembly) (*4)
Connection symbol
Special symbol
Number of axis used on the same surface
(*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
(*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class (*4) See P67 The reference for standard tap hole type of a rail

74 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Dimensions of Rail Basic load rating Static allowance morment kN·m Mass
Width Mp My Mr
W2 Heigh Value Pitch Block Rail
C Co
W d1 x d2 x h
1
H1 G P kN kN kg kg/m
±0.05 1 2(Contact) 1 2(Contact) 1
8.3 10 0.042 0.224 0.042 0.224 0.079 0.125
15 9.5 13 20 60 4.5x7.5x5.3 1.3
12.1 16.2 0.115 0.552 0.115 0.552 0.129 0.203
11.1 13.1 0.063 0.342 0.063 0.342 0.137 0.187
20 11 16.5 20 60 6x9.5x8.5 2.2
16.1 21.2 0.173 0.838 0.173 0.838 0.223 0.301
17.9 20.4 0.123 0.670 0.123 0.670 0.246 0.320
23 12.5 20 20 60 7x11x9 3.0
25.8 33.1 0.337 1.636 0.337 1.636 0.398 0.527
1N≒0.102kgf

Linear Motion Guide 75

A Linear Motion Guide

6. Slim Linear Motion Guide HS, HS-S Series

HS-S Series (Spacer Chain Type) HS-S Series (Spacer Chain Type)

Spacer Ball Chain

Cross Section Detail of Raceway of HS-S Series

Moment Rigidity Radial Rigidity

76 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Standard and maximum length of a rail

Unit : mm
Model No. HS25 HS30 HS35 HS45 HS55
220 280 440 570 780
340 360 520 675 900
400 440 600 780 1020
520 760 885
Standard length 2200 840 2820
2320 2520 2880 2940
2440 2680 2840 2985 3060
2840 2920 3090
3000
Standard pitch P 60 80 80 10.5 120
G 20 20 20 22.5 30
Max. length 4000

Standard tap hole type of a rail

Model No. S h(mm)

HS25 M6 12
HS30 M8 15
HS35 M8 17
HS45 M12 24
HS55 M14 24

Linear Motion Guide 77

A Linear Motion Guide

HS-R Series, HS-RL Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length B C MXℓ L1 T N E Grease H3
H W L nipple
HS 25R 83 35 58.3
36 48 35 M6x6.5 8 9 12 B-M6F 7
HS 25RL 102.9 50 78.2
HS 30R 97.8 40 70.8
42 60 40 M8x8 8 8.2 12 B-M6F 7
HS 30RL 120 60 93
HS 35R 110 50 80.8
48 70 50 M8x10 15 10 12 B-M6F 7.5
HS 35RL 135.4 72 106.2

Composition of Model No.

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Full-ball type / S–Spacer Chain type
Form of block : R–Rectangular standard type / RL–Rectangular long type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / SS–End seal + Inside seal / ZZ–End seal + Inside seal + metal scraper
UULF-End seal + LF seal / SSLF- End seal + Inside seal + LF seal / ZZLF - End seal + Inside seal + metal scraper + LF seal (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload / G2–Heavy preload / Gs–Special preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision / SP–Super Precision / UP–Ultra Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly) / A– Rail tap hole type (an underside assembly) (*4)
Connection symbol
Special symbol
Number of axis used on the same surface
(*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
(*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class (*4) See P77 The reference for standard tap hole type of a rail

78 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Linear Motion Guide 79

A Linear Motion Guide

HS-SR Series, HS-SRL Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length B C MXℓ L1 T N E Grease H3
H W L nipple
HS 25SR 83 35 58.3
36 48 35 M6x6.5 8 9 12 B-M6F 7
HS 25SRL 102.9 50 78.2
HS 30SR 97.8 40 70.8
42 60 40 M8x8 8 8.2 12 B-M6F 7
HS 30SRL 120 60 93
HS 35SR 110 50 80.8
48 70 50 M8x10 15 10 12 B-M6F 7.5
HS 35SRL 135.4 72 106.2
HS 45SR 138.5 60 106
60 86 60 M10x15 15 10.5 13 B-PT1/8 10
HS 45SRL 170.2 80 137.8
HS 55SR 171 75 132.6
70 100 75 M12x15 20 11 13 B-PT1/8 13
HS 55SRL 210.6 95 172.2

Composition of Model No.

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

80 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Dimensions of Rail Basic load rating Static allowance morment kN·m Mass
Width Mp My Mr
W2 Heigh Value Pitch Block Rail
C Co
W1 d1 x d2 x h
±0.05
H1 G P kN kN 1 2(Contact) 1 2(Contact) 1 kg kg/m
25.8 33.1 0.337 1.636 0.337 1.636 0.398 0.53
23 12.5 20 20 60 7x11x9 3.0
31.7 43.6 0.596 2.760 0.596 2.760 0.525 0.71
48.0 57.1 0.711 3.384 0.711 3.384 0.828 0.9
28 16 25.1 20 80 9x14x14.1 4.85
58.0 73.6 1.203 5.506 1.203 5.506 1.067 1.1
63.7 74.6 1.062 5.012 1.062 5.012 1.298 1.5
34 18 27 20 80 9x14x13 6.58
77.1 96.2 1.797 8.172 1.797 8.172 1.674 2.01
82.9 95.5 1.789 8.251 1.789 8.251 1.992 2.49
45 20.5 32 22.5 105 14x20x17 9.75
99.7 122.5 2.984 13.341 2.984 13.341 2.556 3.18
133.5 149.2 3.495 16.007 3.495 16.007 3.608 4.15
53 23.5 38 30 120 16x23x20 13.75
160.4 191.4 5.826 25.899 5.826 25.899 4.627 5.29
1N≒0.102kgf

Linear Motion Guide 81

A Linear Motion Guide

7. Miniature Linear Motion Guide M Series

1) Structure of M Series
WON Miniature Linear Motion Guide M Series has a shape of a gothic-arch groove in the raceway
between a rail and a block and a 4-direction equal type structure with 2-row 4-point contact balls at
45 degree. Even though it is small in size, it provides stable travel and rigidity under the environ-
ment where variable load and combined load is applied.

2) Features of M Series
a. A compact highly-rigid 4-direction equal load type
b. Various specifications for easy design with space and load rating taken into account
c. Balls are maintained during the assembly of a block and a rail since a wire to retain balls is built
in the block.
d. It’s material is stainless steel which does not rust easily, so it is very suitable for the environment
where rust and particle generation should be prevented - clean room, for instance.

8. Wide Miniature Linear Motion Guide MB Series

1) Structure of MB Series
WON Miniature Linear Motion Guide MB Series has a 4-direction equal load type which is identical
to M Series, and the basic load rating and moment load are significantly improved compared to the
general M Series by broadening the width between a rail and a block.

2) Features of MB Series
a. As the width between a rail and a block is broadened and the number of balls increased, load
rating and moment load are improved.
b. Suitable for use in a one-axis type since it is wider than the general miniature Linear Motion
guide and rigidity increased.
c. A compact highly-rigid 4-direction equal load type
d. Various specifications for easy design with space and load rating taken into account
e. Balls are maintained during the assembly of a block and a rail since a wire to retain balls is built
in the block.
f. Its material is stainless steel which does not rust easily so it is very suitable for the environment
where rust and particle generation should be prevented for clean room, for instance.
For MB12 and MB15 Model Numbers, Bearing Steel material (MBT12, MBT15) is ready to produce.

82 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Miniature Linear Motion Guide M, MB Series

Standard M Series

Standard

Wide body MB Series

Wide body

Bolt fastening

Linear Motion Guide 83

A Linear Motion Guide

Types and Features

Category Type Shape & Features

M-C

Standard Miniature Linear-

Motion Guide Semiconductor
Compact test equipment,
M-N
type Bearing steel material of semiconductor
blocks for the type of MT12 assembly equip-
and MT15 are available. ment,
display test equip-
ment,
M-L HEAD-axis LED
inspection equip-
ment,
pneumatic ma-
chinery,
table cylinder,
MB-C
MBT-C automation ma-
chinery,
High rigidity is achieved as the medical equip-
block is wider and longer than ment,
M Series to increase load rating smart actuators,
Wide MB-N and allowable moment. Cartesian coordin-
board MBT-N ated robot,
Bearing steel material of UVW stage
blocks for the type of MBT12
and MBT15 are available.

MB-L
MBT-L

84 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Standard and maximum length of a rail

Unit : mm

Model No. M5 M7 M9 M12 MT12 M15 MT15 M20 MB5 MB7 MB9 MB12 MBT12 MBT13 MB15 MBT15
40 40 55 70 70 70 70 220 50 50 50 70 70 110 110 110
55 55 75 95 95 110 110 280 70 80 80 110 110 150 150 150
70 70 95 120 120 150 150 340 90 110 110 150 150 190 190 190
115 145 145 190 190 460 140 190 190 230 230 230
Standard
100 100 170 170 230 230 130 260 230 230 270 270 270
length
130 130 275 1120 150 290 500
160 160 375 570 570 670 670 1240 170 350 710 590 590 750 750 750
495 695 695 870 870 1360 860 750 750 790 790 790
820 820 1070 1070 910 910 910 910 910
Standard
maximum 1000 1000 995 995 1995 1990 1990 1960 990 980 2000 1990 1990 1990 1990 1990
length of a rail
Standard 15 15 20 25 25 40 40 60 20 30 30 40 40 40 40 40
pitch P
G 5 5 7.5 10 10 15 15 20 5 10 10 15 15 15 15 15
Max. length 1000 2000 1000 2000

Standard tap hole type of a rail

Model No. S (Thru) Model No. S (Thru)

M5 M2.6 MB5 M3
M7 M3 MB7 M4
M9 M4 MB9 M4
M12 / MT12 M4 MB12 / MBT12 M5
M15 / MT15 M4 MBT13 M5
M20 M6 MB15 / MBT15 M5

Linear Motion Guide 85

A Linear Motion Guide

M Series

External dimension Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length L1 N E Greas
B C Mxℓ nipple H3
H W L

13
12

16
15

*Bearing steel material of rails for the type of MT12 and MT15
Composition of Model No. are available.

M12 N UU

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Full-ball type
Form of block : C–Rectangular short type / N–Rectangular standard type / L–Rectangular long type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / UULF–End seal + LF seal (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly) / A– Rail tap hole type (an underside assembly) (*4)
Connection symbol
Special symbol
Number of axis used on the same surface
(*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
(*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class (*4) See P85 The reference for standard tap hole type of a rail

86 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

516 757 1.3 7.1 1.3 7.1 2.01 3.1

0
-0.02 631 1,009 2.2 11.6 2.2 11.6 2.67 4.0

901 1,136 1.9 11.8 1.9 11.8 4.14 6.4

0 1,197 1,703 4.2 23.1 4.2 23.1 6.22 9.0
-0.02
1,631 2,650 10.1 50.0 10.1 50.0 9.67 12.6

1,180 1,485 3.1 17.9 3.1 17.9 6.90 9.9

0 1,721 2,545 9.3 46.6 9.3 46.6 11.84 17.1
-0.02
2,375 4,030 21.9 102.8 21.9 102.8 18.74 25.2

2,175 2,385 5.4 32.9 5.4 32.9 14.79 19.8

0
3,023 3,816 14.4 75.8 14.4 75.8 23.66 31.5
-0.025
4,246 6,200 34.8 169.1 34.8 169.1 38.44 45.9
3,418 3,895 12.2 71.6 12.2 71.6 29.99 37.8
0
4.540 5,842 28.6 148.7 28.6 148.7 44.99 57.6
-0.025
6.492 9,737 73.5 351.2 73.5 351.2 74.98 85.5
4.512 5,299 20.7 115.9 20.7 115.9 54.05 80.1
0
6.191 8,328 50.2 252.7 50.2 252.7 84.94 119.7
-0.03
8.396 12,870 118.6 554.4 118.6 554.4 131.27 176.4

Linear Motion Guide 87

A Linear Motion Guide

MB Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length Grease
B C Mxℓ L1 N E H3
H W L nipple

MBT 13C 35.3 - 18.7

MBT 13N 15 50 49.2 35 18 M4 x 4.5 32.6 3.1 3.5 A-M3 3
MBT 13L 68.6 35 52

*Bearing steel material of rails for the type of *MB13 is available only with bearing steel.
Composition of Model No. MBT12 and MBT15 are available.

M12 N UU

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

88 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

0
10 -0.025 3.5 - - 4 5 20 2.9x4.8x1.6

0
14 -0.05 5.5 - - 5.5 10 30 3.5x6x3.2

0
18 -0.05 6 - - 7 10 30 3.5x6x4.5

0
24-0.05 8 - - 8.5 15 40 4.5x8x4.5

3,694 4,351 14.3 82.8 14.3 82.8 66.1 60.0

0
30-0.05 10 - - 9 15 40 4.5x8x4.5 5,457 7,599 43.7 219.3 43.7 219.3 115.5 103.8 2086
7,576 12,142 111.5 517.4 111.5 517.4 184.6 165.0

0
42-0.05 9 23 9.5 9.5 15 40 4.5x8x4.5

Linear Motion Guide 89

A Linear Motion Guide

9. Roller Linear Motion Guide R Series

1) Structure of R Series
WON Linear Motion Guide R Series uses rollers as a rolling element between the raceway surface of a rail and a
block and its four-row cylindrical roller forms a contact angle of 45° which bears equal load for vertical tensile com-
pression load and horizontal load.
A roller used as a rolling element has less elastic displacement than a ball so it has small displacement for external
load. Also the contact area with the roller is wide so that it has advantages such as high rigidity, bearing against big
load, long life, impact resistance and wear resistance as well as less friction resistance that supports smooth motion
and quite running.
Moreover if the roller is preloaded, it can enhance the rigidity of Linear Motion guide.

2) Features of R Series
a. High quality and very effective in realizing high precision and elimination of labor
b. High rigidity and high precision which can realize the stable travel for a long time
c. Great wear resistance and friction resistance which ensures a long life
d. High rigidity and overload capacity compared to ball types of the same model no.
e. Excellent vibration resistance since it has less displacement against impact load or variable load than ball types
and vibration decay time is shorter compared to natural frequency.
f. Bigger basic static load rating than ball-type Linear Motion guide with the same specifications allows the compact design
using smaller model no. than ball types. If same model no. is used, it achieves longer life due to bigger load rating.
g. Various specification for easy design

Moment rigidity Radial rigidity

Rail bolt fastening type

Rail bolt fastening type Tap hole type (A-type)

90 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Roller Linear Motion Guide R Series

R Series

Cross Section

Linear Motion Guide 91

A Linear Motion Guide

Types and Features

Category Type Shape & Features

- With the tapped flange of a lock, it

can be assembled both from bot-
R-F tom to top and from top to bottom
- A 4-direction equal load type with
high rigidity and high load

Machine tool,
Flange
CNC machining
type
center,
- Having the roller contact structure
CNC tapping
and the cross section identical to
those of S-F Series, it increased load center,
R-FL rating by extending the whole length NC milling ma-
(L1) of Linear Motion guide block chine,
- A 4-direction equal load type with boring machine,
high rigidity and high load multiple machin-
ing center,
planer miller,
large injection
- With the tapped top side of a block,
machine,
a compact type that the width
of Linear Motion guide block is heavy-duty cutting
R-R machine,
minimized
- A 4-direction equal load type with wire-cut penta-
high rigidity and high load hedral processing
center,
Compact
display test equip-
type
ment
- Having the cross section identical to
that of H-R Series, it increased load
rating by extending the whole length
R-RL (L1) of Linear Motion guide block
- A 4-direction equal load type with
high rigidity and high load

92 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Standard and maximum length of a rail

Unit : mm
Model No. 35 45 55
280 570 780
520 885 900
920 1095 1140
1240 1305 1380
Standard 1400 1515 1620
length
1960 2040 2100
2360 2460 2580
2840 2985 3060
3090
Standard pitch P 40 52.5 60
G 20 22.5 30
Max. length 4000

Standard tap hole type of a rail

Model No. S h(mm)

R35 M8 17
R45 M12 24
R55 M14 24

Linear Motion Guide 93

A Linear Motion Guide

R-F Series, R-FL Series

13 8 8
13 8 8
15 11 10
15 11 10
18 13.5 11
18 13.5 11

Composition of Model No.

R35

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

Type of block : No symbol–Roller type
Form of block : R–Rectangular standard type / RL–Rectangular long type / F–Flange standard type / FL–Flange long type
Type of seal : UU–End seal / SS–End seal + Inside seal / ZZ–End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper (*1)
Number of blocks combined in 1 rail
Symbol of clearance : No symbol–Normal preload / G1–Light preload / G2–Heavy preload / Gs–Special preload (*2)
Length of rail
Size of G value : standard G value has no symbol.
Symbol of precision : No symbol–Moderate precision / H–High precision / P–Precision / SP–Super Precision / UP–Ultra Precision (*3)
No symbol–Rail counter bore type (A topside assembly) / A– Rail tap hole type (an underside assembly) (*4)
Connection symbol
Special symbol
Number of axis used on the same surface
(*1) See P99 Symbol List of Optional Parts (*2) See P17 Radial Clearance
(*3) See P24 Selection of Precision Class (*4) See P93 The reference for standard tap hole type of a rail

94 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Dimensions of Rail Basic load rating Static allowance moment kN·m Mass
Width Heigh Value Pitch C Co Mp My Mr Block Rail
W1 W2 d1 x d2 x h kN kN kg kg/m
±0.05 H1 G P 1 2(contact) 1 2(contact) 1

Linear Motion Guide 95

A Linear Motion Guide

R-R Series, R-RL Series

External dimensions Dimensions of block

Model
No. Height Width Length Grease
B C Mxℓ L1 T N E nipple H3
H W L

Composition of Model No.

R35 R

Model No. of Linear Motion Guide

96 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Unit : mm

Dimensions of Rail Basic load rating Static allowance moment kN·m Mass
Width Heigh Value Pitch C Co Mp My Mr Block Rail
W1 W2 d1 x d2 x h kN kN kg kg/m
±0.05 H1 G P 1 2(contact) 1 2(contact) 1

Linear Motion Guide 97

A Linear Motion Guide

13 Options
1. Seal and Rail Cap
Item Place to attach seal Applications
End seal

End seal - Where dust or particle is frequently generated

Wrench bolt

- Where foreign substance can be easily accessed

from the flank or bottom
- Where Linear Motion guide is moving in a vertical,
horizontal, and reverse direction
Inside seal
- Where a lot of cutting chips or foreign substance
present
Inside seal - Where there is a danger in the intrusion of cutting
chips or foreign substances into the block

Metal scraper

- Where spatters may arise such as welding slag or

Metal scraper
metal powers

LF seal - Use within the maximum operating temperature of

40℃.
- Avoid contact with organic solvents, such as thinner
LF seal or milky white oil.
- During the initial use of the LF-SEAL, the rolling
resistance may increase.
- LF-SEAL (1EA) should use both sides of each block.

- If foreign substance enters into the bolt holes in a rail,

it may intrude even into the block. A metal or plastic
cap is used to prevent it.
Rail cap
- C : plastic material railcap
- MC : metal material railcap
railcap for each part no in the catalog is available.

98 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Symbol List of Optimal Parts

Inside seal
LF seal

End seal

Lubrication seal cover Support plate

Inner track

Out track
End plate

Scraper unit
Metal scraper

Symbol Optional parts

UU End seal
SS End seal + Inside seal
ZZ End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper
UULF End seal + LF seal
SSLF End seal + Inside seal + LF seal
ZZLF End seal + Inside seal + Metal scraper + LF seal

Option Mapping Table by Model No.

Ball Linear Motion Guide Miniature Linear Motion Guide Roller Linear Motion Guide
Symbol
H Series / S Series M / MB Series R Series
UU O O -
SS O - -
ZZ O - O
UULF O O -
SSLF O - -
ZZLF O - -

Linear Motion Guide 99

A Linear Motion Guide

The installation option table of Linear Motion Guide way

(Standard length)

Unit : mm

Standard L
Symbol length UU SS ZZ UULF SSLF ZZLF
15F/R/SF/SR 57 57 57 63.7 69 69 75.7
15FL/RL/SFL/SRL 65.3 65.3 65.3 72 77.3 77.3 84
20F/R/SF/SR 72.7 72.7 72.7 81.4 84.7 84.7 93.4
20FL/RL/SFL/SRL 88.6 88.6 88.6 97.3 100.6 100.6 109.3
25F/R/SF/SR 83 83 83 91.7 95 95 103.7
25FL/RL/SFL/SRL 102.9 102.9 102.9 111.6 114.9 114.9 123.6
30F/R/SF/SR 97.8 97.8 97.8 107.7 111.8 111.8 121.7
H
30FL/RL/SFL/SRL 120 120 120 129.9 134 134 143.9
35F/R/SF/SR 110 110 110 120 124 124 134
35FL/RL/SFL/SRL 135.4 135.4 135.4 145.4 149.4 149.4 159.4
45F/R/SF/SR 139 139 139 148.9 154 154 163.9
45FL/RL/SFL/SRL 170.8 170.8 170.8 180.7 185.8 185.8 195.7
55F/R/SF/SR 163 163 163 172.9 179 179 188.9
55FL/RL/SFL/SRL 201.1 201.1 201.1 211 217.1 217.1 227
15C/CF/SC/SCF 40.2 40.2 40.2 46.9 52.2 52.2 58.9
15R/F/SR/SF 56.9 56.9 56.9 63.6 68.9 68.9 75.6
20C/CF/SC/SCF 47.2 47.2 47.2 55.9 59.2 59.2 67.9
S
20R/F/SR/SF 66.3 66.3 66.3 75 78.3 78.3 87
25C/CF/SC/SCF 59.1 59.1 59.1 67.8 71.1 71.1 79.8
25R/F/SR/SF 83 83 83 91.7 95 95 103.7
25R/SR 83 83 83 91.7 95 95 103.7
25RL/SRL 102.9 102.9 102.9 111.6 114.9 114.9 123.6
30R/SR 97.8 97.8 97.8 107.7 111.8 111.8 121.7
30RL/SRL 120 120 120 129.9 134 134 143.9
35R/SR 110 110 110 120 124 124 134
HS
35RL/SRL 135.4 135.4 135.4 145.4 149.4 149.4 159.4
45SR 139 139 139 148.9 154 154 163.9
45SRL 170.8 170.8 170.8 180.7 185.8 185.8 195.7
55SR 163 163 163 172.9 179 179 188.9
55SRL 201.1 201.1 201.1 211 217.1 217.1 227

100 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

※ LF-SEAL General Precautions
1. Use within the maximum operating temperature of 40℃.
2. Avoid contact with organic solvents, such as thinner or
milky white oil.
3. D uring the initial use of the LF-SEAL, the rolling resist-
ance may increase.
4. LF-SEAL (1EA) should use both sides of each block.

Unit : mm Unit : mm

Standard L Standard L
Symbol length Symbol length
UU UULF UU UULF
5C 17 17 21.4 5C 21 21 25.4
5N 20 20 24.4 5N 25 25 29.4
5NA 20 20 24.4 7C 24 24 29
7C 19.8 19.8 24.8 7N 33 33 38
7N 24.3 24.3 29.3 7L 43.5 43.5 48.5
7L 31.8 31.8 36.8 9C 28.1 28.1 33.1
7LA 31.8 31.8 36.8 9N 40.2 40.2 45.2
9C 22.4 22.4 27.4 9L 52 52 57
9N 31.3 31.3 36.3 MB 12C 31.1 31.1 37.1
9L 41.4 41.4 46.4 12N 44.5 44.5 50.5
M
9LA 41.4 41.4 46.4 13C 35.3 35.3 42.3
12C 26.4 26.4 32.4 13N 49.2 49.2 56.2
12N 34.9 34.9 40.9 13L 68.6 68.6 75.6
12L 45.4 45.4 51.4 12L 59.7 59.7 65.7
15C 34.4 34.4 41.4 15C 42.8 42.8 49.8
15N 44.4 44.4 51.4 15N 56.6 56.6 63.6
15L 59.4 59.4 66.4 15L 75.8 75.8 82.8
20C 39.8 39.8 46.8
20N 51.8 51.8 58.8
20L 69.8 69.8 76.8

Linear Motion Guide 101

A Linear Motion Guide

2. Oil Filler
Fuelling on the side and top is available in R Series. The standard specification does not include
the oil filler that penetrates the block of Linear Motion guide to protect it from foreign substance.
Therefore, if you have a request, please contact WON ST.

Unit : mm

Hole for a side nipple Top oil filler

Model No.
θ1 N1 D1 D2 (O-ring) I θ2
35F(L) 10.4 8 5.2 10.7 S7 0.4 11
35R(L) 10.4 15 5.2 10.7 S7 7.4 11
45F(L) 10.4 10 5.2 10.7 S7 0.4 11
R
45R(L) 10.4 20 5.2 10.7 S7 10.4 11
55F(L) 12.5 11 5.2 10.7 S7 0.4 11
55R(L) 12.5 21 5.2 10.7 S7 10.4 11

102 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

3. Grease Nipple
WON ST provides various kinds of grease nipple necessary for lubricating the system of Linear Motion guide.

A-Ø3 A-M3 A-M4 B-M6F B-PT1/8

H 20, 25, 30, 35

M15, 20 H 15
HW 17, 21 HW 27, 35 H 45, 55
MB 13, 15 S 15
S 20, 25

Grease nipple
A - Ø3 A-M3 A-M4 B-M6F B-PT1/8
model no.
Application M 15, 20 H 15 H 20, 25
HW 17, 21 H 30, 35 HW 27, 35 H 45, 55
model no. MB 13, 15 S 15 S 20, 25
Thread (L) Length

Standard 4 4.2 4 5 5 5 8

ZZ - - 6 7 7 - 11

LF 9 7.7 10 10 12 12 15.5

LF + ZZ - - 12 12 14.5 - 18

Linear Motion Guide 103

A Linear Motion Guide

4. Connection of oil pipes

WOL Type

WOS Type

Grease nipple WOL-E WOS-B WOL-A, WOL-B, WOL-A, WOL-B, WOL-C, WOL-D,
model no. WOS-A, WOS-B WOS-A, WOS-B WOS-C, WOS-D
Application H 15 H 20 H 25
H 30, 35 H 45, 55
model no. S 15 S 20 S 25
Thread (L) Length

Standard 4 5 5 5 8

ZZ 6 7 7 7 11

LF 10 10 10 12 15.5

LF + ZZ 12 12 12 14.5 18

104 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

5. How to install Linear Motion guide using a support rail
Linear Motion guide block should be inserted into or removed from the rail using a support rail for
safety.
If you install the block in the rail without using the support rail, a rolling element may deviate from
the block and damage or destroy the parts inside.
If the block without a rolling element is installed, it may significantly shorten the block’s life and lead
to load reduction and early breakage.
If you use the support rail, do not lean it. Adhere it to the end of the rail and slowly apply force to
assemble it.
If the block is contaminated by dust as the rolling element is deviated from it, please do not use the
product and contact WON ST for advice.

Linear Motion Guide 105

A Linear Motion Guide

14 Instructions for Handling

1. Handling
1) T he packaged WON Linear Motion guide is damp-proof after grease removal and cleaning, so please open it just before use.
2) The rail-block compatible product is fitted with a plastic support rail. Please take caution when assembling it with the rail.
3) If you reassemble a block-rail set product or a single block product after dismantling it into pieces, foreign substance
may intrude into the block, decreasing performance to make rolling motion unsmooth or damaged. So please do not
disassemble it.
4) If either a rail or a block leans to one side, the block or the rail may fall to be damaged. Please take caution and avoid
the deviation of the block or the rail.
5) The end plate may be damaged if impact is applied since it is made of plastic material. Please be careful.

2. Lubrication
1) If the product is supplied as it is applied by rust preventive oil, please clean it off thoroughly and fill lubricant prior to use.
2) Do not mix it with other lubricants such as thickener or additive. If so, it may destroy the structure of grease or cause a
harmful effect.
3) Viscosity of grease may vary depending on temperature and increase in winter due to low temperature, and the friction
resistance of Linear Motion guide may increase.
4) In case of using special lubricant, please contact WON in advance.
5) In case of using oil lubricant, it may not reach the hole of raceway depending on the assembly status or direction of
a block and a rail, so no lubricating effect may be obtained. WON can offer the lubricating method suitable for each
assembly environment so please contact WON.

3. Caution for Use

1) After opening the product, please put damp-proof agent inside the dry container for storage.
2) Please handle the product after wearing plastic gloves in a clean place.
3) Please be careful to protect it from foreign substance which may inhibit rolling motion or damage function.
4) Please protect it using a holding door or cover to prevent Linear Motion guide exposed directly to poor environment that
may cause corrosion or damage.
5) In case of using standard plastic end plate-based Linear Motion guide, use it at under 80℃. To use it at higher temper-
ature than 80℃, please order a metal end plate which will specially customized.
6) If the rail of Linear Motion guide is fixed at the ceiling or in high place and if the block bears load downwards, the end
plate may be destroyed or a ball may come off from the rail resulting in the fall of the block and fixtures. So please take
a measure to install a safety device.

4. Storage
Depending on storage conditions, a rail may warp. For storage, place it in a horizontal position in the package box provided
by WON or in a similar box with the flat bottom and avoid the environments where temperature is too high or low and very
humid.

106 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

Cause and Countermeasure of Damage of Linear Motion Guide
Condition Cause Countermeasures
Damage by life Change Linear Motion guide
▪ Flaking Reconsider the model no. selected,use higher
Fatigue - Caused by rolling fatigue on the rolling model no, lower the load level, reinforce the
Overload
failure on surface assembly precision during installation, enhance the
the rolling - Maximum shear stress-induced internal rigidity of base and table

surface cracks are expressed on the surface. Poor Refill lubricant, shorten the refilling interval of
lubricant, review the relevance of lubricant in use,
lubrication improve the lubricant passage
Reconsider the model no. selected, lower the load level,
Impact load or
Indentation ▪ Indentation reinforce the assembly precision during installation, use the
excessive external load
of the rolling - P
lastic deformation on the rolling sur- higher model no.
surface face due to excessive external load Prevent impact and fall during handling
Careless handling
Improve handling method and environment
▪ Burn
Refill lubricant, use the optimal lubricant, improve
- Rough surface of the rolling surface due to slight Poor lubrication
the lubrication method
burning by friction between a rolling element and
Seizing Review the service conditions, lower the load level, use the
the rolling surface
- Cause for the discoloration of the rolling surface, Overload higher model no. enhance the assembly precision during
weakened hardness, and flaking installation
Reconsider the model no. selected, use the higher
Impact load or
▪ Cracking model no. lower the load level, enhance the
excessive external load
assembly precision during installation
- Partial breaking into pieces of a rolling Prevent the intrusion of foreign substance, develop
Cracking
element or rolling surface due to Poor raceway circulation a dust proof measure, refill lubricant, shorten the
excessive external load of a rolling element refilling interval of lubricant, improve the lubrication
method
▪ Abnormal wear Reconsider the model no. selected, use the higher
Excessive load or
model no., lower the load level, enhance the
- Rapid increase in wear as the slippery excessive eccentric load
assembly precision during installation
Abnormal between a rolling element and the rolling
Foreign Complement the performance of seal, develop a dust proof measure
wear surface
Refill lubricant, use the optimal lubricant, improve
- Cause for failure in precision and pre-
substance the lubrication method, improve the lubricant
load as companied by oxidation wear passage
Review the service conditions, use the higher
▪ Vibration Load model no., enhance the assembly precision during
- Wear facilitated by the loss of oil film installation
Flatting Improve the transport condition, change lubricant,
during the running of vibrant stroke and
corrosion
the slippery between a rolling element Vibration
improve the lubrication method, shorten the refilling
interval of lubricant
and the rolling element
Foreign substance Complement the performance of seal, develop a dust proof measure
Make a rust-preventive treatment onto the surface,
▪ Rust Intrusion of cooling complement the performance of seal, change lub-
- Caused by the loss of oil film or contact water ricant, change cooling agent, refill lubricant, shorten
Rust of exposed part to water, acid, alkali the refilling interval of lubricant
Make a rust-preventive treatment onto the surface, improve
prevention and especially when cooling water High humidity environment
enters into the block; cause for early Improve the condition of storage, reinforce the sealing
flaking due to concentrated stress Poor handling
performance, apply sufficient amount of rust-preventive oil

Linear Motion Guide 107

A Linear Motion Guide

<Comparison Table of Full-Ball Type Model No. of Other Manufacturers>

1. H Series(Standard Type)
WON THK NSK PMI HIWIN
H 15F LH 15EL, EM
HSR 15A, B MSA 15A HGW 15CA
H 15FL LH 15GL, GM

H 20F HSR 20A, B LH 20EL, EM MSA 20A HGW 20CA

H 20FL HSR 20LA, LB LH 20GL, GM MSA 20LA HGW 20HA

H 25F HSR 25A, B LH 25EL, EM MSA 25A HGW 25CA

H 25FL HSR 25LA, LB LH 25GL, GM MSA 25LA HGW 25HA

H 30F HSR 30A, B LH 30EL, EM MSA 30A HGW 30CA

H 30FL HSR 30LA, LB LH 30GL, GM MSA 30LA HGW 30HA

H 35F HSR 35A, B LH 35EL, EM MSA 35A HGW 35CA

H 35FL HSR 35LA, LB LH 35GL, GM MSA 35LA HGW 35HA

H 45F HSR 45A, B LH 45EL, EM MSA 45A HGW 45CA

H 45FL HSR 45LA, LB LH 45GL, GM MSA 45LA HGW 45HA

H 55F HSR 55A, B LH 55EL, EM MSA 55A HGW 55CA

H 55FL HSR 55LA, LB LH 55GL, GM MSA 55LA HGW 55HA

H 15R LH 15AN, AL
HSR 15R MSA 15S HGH 15CA
H 15RL LH 15BL, BL

H 20R HSR 20R LH 20AN, AL MSA 20S HGH 20CA

H 20RL HSR 20LR LH 20BN, BL MSA 20LS HGH 20HA

H 25R HSR 25R LH 25AN, AL MSA 25S HGH 25CA

H 25RL HSR 25LR LH 25BN, BL MSA 25LS HGH 25HA

H 30R HSR 30R LH 30AN, AL MSA 30S HGH 30CA

H 30RL HSR 30LR LH 30BN, BL MSA 30LS HGH 30HA

H 35R HSR 35R LH 35AN, AL MSA 35S HGH 35CA

H 35RL HSR 35LR LH 35BN, BL MSA 35LS HGH 35HA

H 45R HSR 45R LH 45AN, AL MSA 45S HGH 45CA

H 45RL HSR 45LR LH 45BN, BL MSA 45LS HGH 45HA

H 55R HSR 55R LH 55AN, AL MSA 55S HGH 55CA

H 55RL HSR 55LR LH 55BN, BL MSA 55LS HGH 55HA

108 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

2. HW Series(Standard Wide body Type)

WON THK NSK PMI PMI HIWIN

HW 17F HRW 17CA LW 17EL - WEW 17CC LWFF 33

HW 21F HRW 21CA LW 21EL MSG 21E WEW 21CC LWFF 37

HW 27F HRW 27CA LW 27EL MSG 27E WEW 27CC LWFF 42

HW 35F HRW 35CA LW 35EL MSG 35E WEW 35CC LWFF 69

HW 17R HRW 17CR - - WEH 17CA LWFF 33

HW 21R HRW 21CR - MSG 21S WEH 21CA LWFF 37

HW 27R HRW 27CR - MSG 27S WEH 27CA LWFF 42

HW 35R HRW 35CR - MSG 35S WEH 35CA -

3. S Series(Slim Type)

WON THK NSK PMI HIWIN

S 15C SR 15V LS 15CL MSB 15TS EGH 15SA
S 15R SR 15W LS 15AL MSB 15S EGH 15CA
S 20C SR 20V LS 20CL MSB 20TS EGH 20SA
S 20R SR 20W LS 20AL MSB 20S EGH 20CA
S 25C SR 25V LS 25CL MSB 25TS EGH 25SA
S 25R SR 25W LS 25AL MSB 25S EGH 25CA
S 15CF SR 15SB LS 15EM MSB 15TE EGW 15CA
S 15F SR 15TB LS 15JM MSB 15E EGW 15CB
S 20CF SR 20SB LS 20EM MSB 20TE EGW 20CA
S 20F SR 20TB LS 20JM MSB 20E EGW 20CB
S 25CF SR 25SB LS 25EM MSB 25TE EGW 25CA
S 25F SR 25TB LS 25JM MSB 25E EGW 25CB

Linear Motion Guide 109

A Linear Motion Guide

4. M Series(Miniature Standard Type)

WON THK NSK PMI HIWIN IKO
M 5C SRS 5GM - - MGN 5C LWLC 5
M 5N SRS 5GN LU 05TL - - LWL 5
M 7C SRS 7GS - - - LWLC 7
M 7N SRS 7GM LU 07AL MSC 7M MGN 7C LWL 7
M 7L SRS 7GN - MSC 7LM MGN 7H LWLG 7
M 9C SRS 9GS - - - LWLC 9
M 9N SRS 9GM LU 09TL MSC 9M MGN 9C LWL 9
M 9L SRS 9GN LU 09UL MSC 9LM MGN 9H LWLG 9
M 12C SRS 12GS - - - LWLC 12
M 12N SRS 12GM LU 12TL MSC 12M MGN 12C LWL 12
M 12L SRS 12GN LU 12UL MSC 12LM MGN 12H LWLG 12
M 15C SRS 15GS - - - LWLC 15
M 15N SRS 15GM LU 15AL MSC 15M MGN 15C LWL 15
M 15L SRS 15GN LU 15BL MSC 15LM MGN 15H LWLG 15
M 20C - - - - LWLC 20
M 20N SRS 20GM - - - LWL 20
M 20L - - - - LWLG 20

5. MB Series(Miniature Wide body Type)

WON THK NSK PMI HIWIN IKO
MB 5C SRS 5WGM - - - LWLFC 10
MB 5N SRS 5WGN LE 05AL - - LWLF 10
MB 7C SRS 7WGS - - - LWLFC 14
MB 7N SRS 7WGM LU 07TL MSD 7M MGW 7C LWLF 14
MB 7L SRS 7WGN - MSD 7LM MGW 7H LWLFG 14
MB 9C SRS 9WGS - - - LWLFC 18
MB 9N SRS 9WGM LE 09TL, TR MSD 9M MGW 9C LWLF 18
MB 9L SRS 9WGN - MSD 9LM MGW 9H LWLFG 18
MB 12C SRS 12WGS - - - LWLFC 24
MB 12N SRS 12WGM LE 12AL, AR MSD 12M MGW 12C LWLF 24
MB 12L SRS 12WGN - MSD 12LM MGW 12H LWLFG 24
MB 15C SRS 15WGS - - - LWLFC 42
MB 15N SRS 15WGM LE 15AL, AR MSD 15M MGW 15C LWLF 42
MB 15L SRS 15WGN - MSD 15LM MGW 15H LWLFG 42

110 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Motion Guide

<Comparison Table of Spacer Chain type No. of Other Manufacturers>
1. H-S Series (Standard type)
WON THK NSK PMI HIWIN
H 15SF SHS 15C SH 15FL SME 15EA QHW 15CA
H 15SFL SHS 15LC SH 15HL SME 15LEA -
H 20SF SHS 20C SH 20FL SME 20EA QHW 20CA
H 20SFL SHS 20LC SH 20HL SME 20LEA QHW 20HA
H 25SF SHS 25C SH 25FL SME 25EA QHW 25CA
H 25SFL SHS 25LC SH 25HL SME 25LEA QHW 25HA
H 30SF SHS 30C SH 30FL SME 30EA QHW 30CA
H 30SFL SHS 30LC SH 30HL SME 30LEA QHW 30HA
H 35SF SHS 35C SH 35FL SME 35EA QHW 35CA
H 35SFL SHS 35LC SH 35HL SME 35LEA QHW 35HA
H 45SF SHS 45C SH 45FL SME 45EA QHW 45CA
H 45SFL SHS 45LC SH 45HL SME 45LEA QHW 45HA
H 55SF SHS 55C SH 55FL - -
H 55SFL SHS 55LC SH 55HL - -
H 15SR SHS 15R SH 15AN SME 15SA QHH 15CA
H 15SRL - SH 15BN SME 15LSA -
H 20SR SHS 20V SH 20AN SME 20SA QHH 20CA
H 20SRL SHS 20LV SH 20BN SME 20LSA QHH 20HA
H 25SR SHS 25R SH 25AN SME 25SA QHH 25CA
H 25SRL SHS 25LR SH 25BN SME 25LSA QHH 25HA
H 30SR SHS 30R SH 30AN SME 30SA QHH 30CA
H 30SRL SHS 30LR SH 30BN SME 30LSA QHH 30HA
H 35SR SHS 35R SH 35AN SME 35SA QHH 35CA
H 35SRL SHS 35LR SH 35BN SME 35LSA QHH 35HA
H 45SR SHS 45R SH 45AN SME 45SA QHH 45CA
H 45SRL SHS 45LR SH 45BN SME 45LSA QHH 45HA
H 55SR SHS 55R SH 55AN - -
H 55SRL SHS 55LR SH 55BN - -

Linear Motion Guide 111

A Linear Motion Guide

2. S-S Series (Slim type)

WON THK NSK PMI HIWIN

S 15SC SSR 15XV SS 15CL SME 15EB QEH 15SA
S 15SR SSR 15XW SS 15AL SME 15LEB QEH 15CA
S 20SC SSR 20XV SS 20CL SME 20EB QEH 20SA
S 20SR SSR 20XW SS 20AL SME 20LEB QEH 20CA
S 25SC SSR 25XV SS 25CL SME 25EB QEH 25SA
S 25SR SSR 25XW SS 25AL SME 25LEB QEH 25CA
S 15SCF - SS 15JM SME 15SB QEW 15SA
S 15SF SSR 15XTB SS 15EM SME 15LSB QEW 15CA

S 20SCF - SS 20JM SME 20SB QEW 20SA

S 20SF SSR 20XTB SS 20EM SME 20LSB QEW 20CA

S 25SCF - SS 25JM SME 25SB QEW 25SA

S 25SF SSR 25XTB SS 25EM SME 25LSB QEW 25CA

3. HS-S Series (Slim type)

WON THK
HS 25SR SHS 25V
HS 25SRL SHS 25LV
HS 30SR SHS 30V
HS 30SRL SHS 30LV
HS 35SR SHS 35V
HS 35SRL SHS 35LV
HS 45SR SHS 45V
HS 45SRL SHS 45LV
HS 55SR SHS 55V
HS 55SRL SHS 55LV

112 Linear Motion Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Crossed Roller Bearing

Contents

1 Structure and characteristic

Crossed Roller Bearing

of Crossed Roller Bearing
1. Structure•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 114
2. Characteristics• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 114
3. Use• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 114

2 Kind of Crossed Roller Bearing

1. CB series of revolving inner ring
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 115
2. CH series for high stiffness
115
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

3. CA series of Slim revolving inner ring

9 Cautions in designing compression plate
and housing
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 116
4. CS series for customized special type 1. Housing design for installation •• • • • • • • • • • 122
•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 116 2. Tap for separation• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 122
3 Selection of Crossed Roller Bearing 3. Installation & assembly•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 123
4. SeIection of compressin flange and bolt• • • • • 123
1. Selection summary•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 117
2. Selection sequence• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 117
10 Fitting • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 125
4 Nominal numbering •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 118
11 Precision of Crossed Roller Bearing 126
5 Calculation of service life
•• • • • •

1. Rated service life•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 118

12 Precision of WUP class
2. Calculation of service life under heaving
1. R
otation accuracy of WUP class of
operation condition•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 119
Crossed-Roller Bearing(example)• • • • • • • • • 130
3. Static safety factor(fs)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 119
2. Precision standard• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 130
4. Static equivalent load(Po)•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 120
5. Dynamic equivalent radial load(Pc)•• • • • • 120
6. Load factor(fw)• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 121 13 Radial clearance •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 130

6 Rated load 14 Dimension of Crossed Roller Bearing

1. Basic dynamic rated load(C)•• • • • • • • • • • • • 121 1. CB series• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 132
2. Basic static rated load(Co)•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • 121 2. CH series•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 134
3. CA series• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 136
7 Permissible rpm •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 122

8 Lubrication •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 122 15 Cautions when handling Crossed Roller

Bearing• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 137

Crossed Roller Bearing

B Crossed Roller Bearing

1 Structure and characteristic of Crossed Roller Bearing

1. Structure
WON Crossed Roller Bearing has the structure having rolling surface with V-grooved inner & outer ring
which is crossed with roller and a spacer-type retainer between rollers reduces the friction between rollers so
as to prevent rotational torque from increasing. It’s a compact type for convenient use.

2. Characteristics
As roller is assembled to rolling surface of inner & outer ring of Crossed Roller Bearing, it reduces the
elastic displacement by external load and accommodates the complex load including radial load, axial
load and moment load and using spacer retainer avoids uneven wear by roller on inclined surface or
uneven contact as well as hitching but helps rolling smoothly and it’s a high precision and high stiffness
type which allows pre-load depending surrounding environment.

3. Use
It’s optimal to the use requiring complex load and high stiffness.
The uses are industrial robot, machine tool index table, ATC, medical equipment, precise alignment
stage, semiconductor manufacture equipment, DD motor and others

Inner ring
Outer ring

Space retainer
Roller

Fig 1. Structure of Crossed Roller Bearing

114 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

2 Kind of Crossed Roller Bearing

Crossed Roller Bearing

1. CB series of revolving inner ring.
1) Inner ring of Crossed Roller Bearing is integral type while outer ring is separable to upper and lower
part which is bolted for easy handling
2) It’s used for the part requiring inner ring rotating such as index table of machine tool or joint or turning
part of industrial robot

2. High stiffness CH series

1) Inner & outer ring are integral, high precision and high stiffness type with less installation error which
leads to stable running accuracy
2) It’s used for the part requiring inner & outer ring rotating simultaneously or independently

Crossed Roller Bearing 115

B Crossed Roller Bearing

3. CA series of slim-typed revolving inner ring

1) Inner ring of crossed roller bearing is slim-compact type while outer ring is separable to upper and
lower part which is bolted for easy handling.
2) It is used for the part requiring inner ring rotating such as index table of machine tool or joint or turning
part of industrial robot.

4. CS series for customized special type

1) It’s customized to meet customer’s own requirements in shape, dimension and material of inner &
outer ring and bolt dimension.

116 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

3 Selection of Crossed Roller Bearing

Crossed Roller Bearing

1. Selection summary
After identifying the requirements specifically, the priority shall be determined considering the needs and
then the optimal type shall be selected

2. Selection sequence
1 Determination Equipment to be used, requirements, environment, precision, stiff-
of the needs ness, service life and others

2 Selection of Integral type, separable inner ring, separable outer ring, normal, high
the type stiffness

3 Load calculation Supporting load including radial load, axial load, moment load and
dynamic equivalent load

4 Calculation of Calculation of rating service life

rating service life

5 Calculation of Static safety factor considering equipment characteristic and external load
static safety factor

6 Determination of Determination of clearance and pre-load considering kinetic condi-

stiffness and pre-load tion and rotation accuracy

7 Accuracy level Determination of accuracy level considering rotation accuracy and

assembly accuracy

8 Determination of Determination of lubrication such as oil, grease or special lubricant

lubrication

9 Final determination

Crossed Roller Bearing 117

B Crossed Roller Bearing

4 Nominal numbering
Numbering system of Crossed Roller Bearing manufactured by WON comprises of model, inner/outer
ring size, seal, preload and grade symbol. See the following example for details.

Blank

Part No. Form Seal Pre-load Accuracy Grade Additional symbols

Seal Pre-load Accuracy Grade Additional symbols
UU : Normal Type G3 : Heavy load No symbol : Normal F : Raydent
- Radial Contact Type P6 : High
LL : Normal Type G2 : Light load
P5 : Accurate N : Nipple
- Face Contact Type G1 : Normal load
DD : Special Type P4 : Highly Accurate
- Special Heavy Duty Seal Type GS : Special load P2 : Extremely Accurate

5 Calculation of service life

1. Rated service life
You can calculate the rated service life of Crossed Roller Bearing by using the formula below.
L : rated service life
C : basic dynamic rated load(N)
Pc : dynamic equivalent radial load (N)
service life time fT : temperature factor
L fW : load factor
Lh = Lh : service life time(h)
60 X N
N : rpm

The temperature on Bearing * Note : w

orkable temperature is 80℃ or below When the
temperature is more than above, please contact
Fig 2. Temperature factor WON ST

118 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

2. Calculation of service life under heaving operation condition

Bearing service life under heaving condition is calculated as follows.

Crossed Roller Bearing

L0c : r ated service life 106 cycle indicated in bearing
heaving frequency under heaving operation

L0c = 90 C P
( )
Pc θ : heaving angle (see Fig)

Pc : dynamic equivalent radial load

※ when Ø is small, oil film can hardly be formed on contact surface between orbital plane and rotating
body so it may cause corrosion

In case of heaving operation

Service life time

360 X L
Lh =
2 X θ X no X 60
Lh : service life time (h)
θ : heaving angle (seg)
(※see Fig on right)
no : n umber of reciprocating motion (min-1)
Fig 3.

3. Static safety factor(fs)

Static safety factor of Crossed Roller Bearing is calculated as follows.
Please see Table 1 for static safety factor in general
fs : static safety factor
C0
fs = C0 : basic static rated load (N)
P0
P0 : static equivalent radial load (maximum load) (N)

Table 1 static safety factor (fS)

Working condition fs Lower bound
Requires high running accuracy ≥3
When using under normal operation condition ≥2
Few rotation under normal operation condition
≥1
and smooth operation is less important

Crossed Roller Bearing 119

B Crossed Roller Bearing

4. Static equivalent load (P0)

Static equivalent load of Crossed Roller Bearing is calculated as follows

Radial load (Fr)

Moment M
P0 : Static equivalent radial load (N)
Fr : Radial load (N)
Fa : Axial load (N) Axial load (Fa)
M : Moment (N•mm)
d+D
DPW : Roller set pitch diameter (DPW ≒ ) Moment M
2
Fig 4. Bearing load

5. Dynamic equivalent radial load (Pc)

Dynamic equivalent radial load of Crossed Roller Bearing is calculated using following equation

Radial load (Fr)

Pc : Dynamic equivalent radial load (N) Moment M

Fr : Radial load (N)
Fa : Axial load (N)
M : Moment (N•mm) Axial load (Fa)

X : Radial load factor (see Table 2)

Y : Axial load factor (see Table 2) Moment M
d+D
DPW : Roller set pitch diameter (DPW ≒ ) Fig 5.
2

Table 2. Radial load factor and axial load factor

Classification X Y
Fa
≤ 1.5 1 0.45
Fr + 2M / DPW

Fa
> 1.5 0.67 0.67
Fr + 2M / DPW

120 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

6. Load factor (fw)

When using Crossed Roller Bearing, the load imposed on bearing by vibration and impact during op-
eration is often greater than calculated load. Thus flowing load factors need to be considered when

Crossed Roller Bearing

selecting the bearing.

Table 3. Load factor(fw)

Load condition fw
Smooth condition without impact 1 ~ 1.2
Normal condition 1.2 ~ 1.5
Vibration and impact load
1.5 ~ 3
together during operation

7. Temperature factor (fT)

The temperature factor is shown in the following graph.

The temperature on Bearing * Note : w

orkable temperature is 80℃ or below When the
temperature is more than above, please contact
Fig 2. Temperature factor WON ST

6 Static load
1. Basic dynamic rated load (C)
It refers to radial load with a constant size and direction which is able to rotate a million times with more
than 90% proved no flaking occurred due to rolling fatigue when driving a bearing group comprising a
number of same crossed roller bearing

2. Basic static rated load (C0)

It refers to the static radial load which imposes a certain level of contact stress on center of contact part
of revolving body and orbital plane exposed to maximum load

Crossed Roller Bearing 121

B Crossed Roller Bearing

7 Permissible rpm
Please see the following table for permissible rpm
But permissible rpm may vary depending on assembly and working condition
Table 4. Permissible rpm of Crossed Roller Bearing (dm.n)

Bearing Classification Seal Grease Oil

Bearing No seal 75,000 150,000
Spacer retainer Both seals 60,000 -

※ dm.n = dm x n
dm : mean value of bearing inner and outer ring (mm)
n : rpm

8 Lubrication
Grease lubrication is commonly used for Crossed Roller Bearing and lubricant is injected through oil inlet.
Albanian EP2 grease is filled
Bearing without lubricant shall be filled with grease or oil prior to starting operation, otherwise, wearing
is accelerated and service life is reduced.

9 Cautions in designing compression plate and housing

Crossed roller bearing is compact and slim and thus plate and housing stiffness and bolt torque shall be
evaluated when designing the installation.
Should the stiffness of the plate or housing be insufficient, tight assembly of inner and outer ring would
be difficult and deformation by moment load causes uneven contact and poor performance significantly.

1. Housing design for installation 2. Tap for separation

Housing thickness shall be more than 60% of Separation tap would help separate the inner &
bearing section height outer ring without damage to bearing

Tap for separation

D-d
T= X 0.6height
2

T : housing thickness
Tap for separation
D : outer ring dimension
d : inner ring dimension Fig 6.

122 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

3. Installation & assembly

Please see the Fig below for installation & assembly

Crossed Roller Bearing

Inner ring rotation inner & outer ring fixed in same direction

Fig 7. Example of installation and assembly

4. Selection of compression flange and bolt

The more compression bolt, the higher the stability. See Table 5 for layout
Please see the Table below for flange thickness (F) and gap (S)
F = B X 0.5 ~ B X 1.2
0
H = B -0.1
S = 0.5mm
Bolts shall be tightened with appropriate torque to prevent them from loosened and when axis and hous-
ing are in a light alloy, steel shall be used.
When using common medium or hard steel, please refer to the Table below

Table 5. No and size of compression bolt Unit : mm

An external diameter of Outer ring(D) Number

Bolt size
More Less of bolt
- 100 8 or more M3 ~ M5
100 200 12 or more M4 ~ M8
200 300 16 or more M5 ~ M12

Table 6. Maximum clamping torque of bolt Unit : N•m

Symbol Clamping Torque Symbol Clamping Torque

M3 2 M8 30
M4 4 M10 70
M5 9 M12 120
M6 14 - - Fig 8.

Crossed Roller Bearing 123

B Crossed Roller Bearing

※Assembly sequence
Assembly sequence of Crossed Roller Bearing is as follows

1. Pre-inspection before assembly

Check to ensure no contaminant, scratch or sharp edge in housing or parts

2. Assembly of axis or housing

Because the bearing is compact type, it’s easily inclined during assembly process and thus it shall be
inserted gradually after making it horizontally balanced using plastic hammer and while hammering the
circumference of outer ring till the part is set in place completely

3. Installation of compression flange

1) After putting the flange in place, it shall be assembled while checking the bolt if it’s in right place
2) Bolt shall be tightened after confirming the bolts are in place accurately
3) Bolt shall be tightened over two to 5 stages from temporary tightening till complete tightening. In case
that inner ring and outer ring are separated, check the position while turning the integral axis slowly
and tighten the bolts over two to five stages gradually.

Fig 9.

124 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

10 Fitting
Please refer to the Table below for fitting

Crossed Roller Bearing

Table 7. Recommended fitting under average load
Tolerance range class
Radial Clearance Load fixed to inner ring rotation Load fixed to outer ring rotation
Shaft Housing Bore Shaft Housing Bore
G2 Clearance h5 H7 g5 J7(1)
G1 Clearance j5 H7 g5 J7(1)
Note(1) small edge joint according to measured value is recommended

Table 8. Recommended fitting for normal gap of slip type

Load fixed to inner ring rotation Load fixed to outer ring rotation
Bearing internal
Shaft Housing Bore Shaft Housing Bore
diameter (d) mm
Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min.
50 +15 0 +13 0 -15 -30 -13 -25
60 +15 0 +13 0 -15 -30 -13 -25
70 +15 0 +15 0 -15 -30 -15 -30

80 +20 0 +15 0 -20 -40 -15 -30

90 +20 0 +15 0 -20 -40 -15 -30
100 +20 0 +15 0 -20 -40 -15 -30

110 +20 0 +20 0 -20 -40 -20 -40

120 +25 0 +20 0 -25 -50 -20 -40
130 +25 0 +25 0 -25 -50 -25 -50

140 +25 0 +25 0 -25 -50 -25 -50

150 +25 0 +25 0 -25 -50 -25 -50

160 +25 0 +25 0 -25 -50 -25 -50

170 +25 0 +30 0 -25 -50 -30 -60
180 +30 0 +30 0 -30 -60 -30 -60

190 +30 0 +30 0 -30 -60 -30 -60

200 +30 0 +30 0 -30 -60 -30 -60

Crossed Roller Bearing 125

B Crossed Roller Bearing

11 Precision of Crossed Roller Bearing

Precision and tolerance of Crossed Roller Bearing are in accordance with Table 9 through 18.
Table 9. CH series inner ring rotation accuracy Unit : ㎛
Inner ring radial Runout Inner ring axis Runout
Part No. High Ultra high High Ultra high
Precision Precision
precision precision precision precision
P5 P4 P2 P5 P4 P2
CH42 4 3 2.5 4 3 2.5
CH66 5 4 2.5 5 4 2.5
CH85 5 4 2.5 5 4 2.5
CH124 5 4 2.5 5 4 2.5
CH148 6 5 2.5 6 5 2.5
CH178 6 5 2.5 6 5 2.5
CH228 8 6 5 8 6 5
CH297 10 8 5 10 8 5
CH445 15 12 7 15 12 7
Note(1) : Standard rotation accuracy of CH series is P5

Table 10. CH series outer ring rotation accuracy Unit : ㎛

Outer ring radial Runout Ourter ring axis Runout

Part No. High Ultra high High Ultra high
Precision Precision
precision precision precision precision
P5 P4 P2 P5 P4 P2
CH42 8 5 4 8 5 4
CH66 10 6 5 10 6 5
CH85 10 6 5 10 6 5
CH124 13 8 5 13 8 5
CH148 15 10 7 15 10 7
CH178 15 10 7 15 10 7
CH228 18 11 7 18 11 7
CH297 20 13 8 20 13 8
CH445 25 16 10 25 16 10
Note(1) : Standard rotation accuracy of CH series is P5

126 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Table 11. CB series inner ring rotation accuracy Unit : ㎛

Nominal dimension Inner ring radial Runout Inner ring axis Runout
of bearing internal

Crossed Roller Bearing

diameter(d)(mm) PE6 PE5 PE4 PE2 PE6 PE5 PE4 PE2
0 0
Over Below P6 P5 P4 P2 P6 P5 P4 P2
18 30 13 8 4 3 2.5 13 8 4 3 2.5
30 50 15 10 5 4 2.5 15 10 5 4 2.5
50 80 20 10 5 4 2.5 20 10 5 4 2.5
80 120 25 13 6 5 2.5 25 13 6 5 2.5
120 150 30 18 8 6 2.5 30 18 8 6 2.5
150 180 30 18 8 6 5 30 18 8 6 5
180 250 40 20 10 8 5 40 20 10 8 5
250 315 50 25 13 10 (6) 50 25 13 10 (6)
315 400 60 30 15 12 (7) 60 30 15 12 (7)
400 500 65 35 18 14 (9) 65 35 18 14 (9)
500 630 70 40 20 16 (10) 70 40 20 16 (10)
630 800 80 (45) (23) (18) (11) 80 (45) (23) (18) (11)
800 1000 90 (50) (25) (20) (12) 90 (50) (25) (20) (12)

Table 12. CA series inner ring rotation accuracy Unit : ㎛

Nominal dimension of bearing internal diameter(d)(mm)

Radial swing axial Runout
Over Below
40 65 13
65 80 15
80 100 15
100 120 20
120 140 25
140 180 25
180 200 30

Crossed Roller Bearing 127

B Crossed Roller Bearing

Table 13. Dimensional tolerance of bearing internal diameter Unit : ㎛

Nominal dimension of Tolerance of dm note2)
bearing internal
diameter (d)(mm) 0, P6, P5, P4, P2, WUP PE6 PE5 PE4, PE2
Over Below Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min.
18 30 0 -10 0 -8 0 -6 0 -5
30 50 0 -12 0 -10 0 -8 0 -6
50 80 0 -15 0 -12 0 -9 0 -7
80 120 0 -20 0 -15 0 -10 0 -8
120 150 0 -25 0 -18 0 -13 0 -10
150 180 0 -25 0 -18 0 -13 0 -10
180 250 0 -30 0 -22 0 -15 0 -12
250 315 0 -35 0 -25 0 -18 - -
315 400 0 -40 0 -30 0 -23 - -
400 500 0 -45 0 -35 - - - -
500 630 0 -50 0 -40 - - - -
630 800 0 -75 0 - - - - -
800 1000 0 -100 - - - - - -
Note(1) : Standard internal diameter of CH series is 0 class, Please contact WON ST for higher class
Note(2) : dm refers to mean value between max diameter and min diameter of 2 points of bearing
Note(3) : In case of no precision class indicated, the highest value of the low precision class is applied

Table 14. Dimensional tolerance of bearing external diameter Unit : ㎛

Nominal dimension of Tolerance of Dmnote2)
bearing internal
diameter (D)(mm) 0, P6, P5, P4, P2, WUP PE6 PE5 PE4, PE2
Over Below Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min.
30 50 0 -11 0 -9 0 -7 0 -6
50 80 0 -13 0 -11 0 -9 0 -7
80 120 0 -15 0 -13 0 -10 0 -8
120 150 0 -18 0 -15 0 -11 0 -9
150 180 0 -25 0 -18 0 -13 0 -10
180 250 0 -30 0 -20 0 -15 0 -11
250 315 0 -35 0 -25 0 -18 0 -13
315 400 0 -40 0 -28 0 -20 0 -15
400 500 0 -45 0 -33 0 -23 - -
500 630 0 -50 0 -38 0 -28 - -
630 800 0 -75 0 -45 0 -35 - -
800 1000 0 -100 - - - - - -
Note(1) : Standard internal diameter of CH series is 0 class, Please contact WON ST for higher class
Note(2) : Dm refers to mean value between max diameter and min diameter of 2 points of bearing
Note(3) : In case of no precision class indicated, the highest value of the low precision class is applied

128 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Table 15. Tolerance of inner & outer ring width of CH series Unit : ㎛

Tolerance of B
Part No.
Max. Min.

Crossed Roller Bearing

CH42 0 -75
CH66 0 -75
CH85 0 -75
CH124 0 -75
CH148 0 -75
CH178 0 -100
CH228 0 -100
CH297 0 -100
CH445 0 -150

Table 16. Tolerance of inner & outer ring width of CB series Unit : ㎛

Nominal dimension of bearing Tolerance of B Tolerance of B1

internal diameter (d) (mm) Applied to CB outer ring Applied to CB inner ring
Over Below Max. Min. Max. Min.
18 30 0 -75 0 -100
30 50 0 -75 0 -100
50 80 0 -75 0 -100
80 120 0 -75 0 -100
120 150 0 -100 0 -120
150 180 0 -100 0 -120
180 250 0 -100 0 -120
250 315 0 -120 0 -150
315 400 0 -150 0 -200
400 500 0 -150 0 -200
500 630 0 -150 0 -200
630 800 0 -150 0 -200
800 1000 0 -300 0 -400

Crossed Roller Bearing 129

B Crossed Roller Bearing

12 Precision of WUP class

1. Rotation accuracy of WUP class of Crossed Roller Bearing (example)
Precision of WUP class is in accordance with ISO Class 2, DIN P2, AFBMA, ABCE9 ad JIS 2 or greater

2. Precision standard
Swing precision of CH, CB and WUP series of Crossed Roller Bearing is in accordance with Table 17 & 18
Table 17. Swing precision of WUP class of CH series Unit : ㎛ Table 18. Swing precision of WUP class of CB series Unit : ㎛

Inner ring swing Outer ring swing Nominal dimension of bearing Swing precision
internal diameter (d) (mm) & of inner ring of CB series
Part precision of CH precision of CH external diameter (D) (mm)
No. Radial Axial Radial Axial Radial swing Axial swing
swing swing swing swing Over Below tolerance tolerance
tolerance tolerance tolerance tolerance
CH42 2 2 3 3 80 180 2.5 2.5
CH66 2 2 3 3 180 250 3 3
CH85 2 2 3 3 250 315 4 4
CH124 2 2 3 3 315 400 4 4
CH148 2 2 4 4 400 500 5 5
CH178 2 2 4 4 500 630 6 6
CH228 2.5 2.5 4 4 630 800 - -
CH297 3 3 5 5
CH445 4 4 7 7

13 Radial clearance
Radial clearance of CH series, CB series and CA series is as follows.

Table 19. Radial clearance of CH series Unit : ㎛ Table 20. Radial clearance of WUP class of CB series Unit : ㎛

G3 G2 Pitch Circle
Starting torque Radial clearance diameter of roller G3 G2
Part No. (dp)(mm)
(N•m) (㎛)
Min. Max. Min. Max. Over Below Min. Max. Min. Max.
CH42 0.1 0.5 0 25 120 160 -10 0 0 40
CH66 0.3 2.2 0 30 160 200 -10 0 0 50
CH85 0.4 3 0 40 200 250 -10 0 0 60
CH124 1 6 0 40 250 280 -15 0 0 80
CH148 1 10 0 40 280 315 -15 0 0 100
CH178 3 15 0 50 315 355 -15 0 0 110
CH228 5 20 0 60 355 400 -15 0 0 120
CH297 10 35 0 70 400 500 -20 0 0 130
CH445 20 55 0 100 500 560 -20 0 0 150
Note : G3 clearance of CH series is controlled by starting 560 630 -20 0 0 170
torque and starting torque of G3 clearance is in the 630 710 -20 0 0 190
status without seal resistance

130 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Table 21. Radial clearance of CB series

Crossed Roller Bearing

Unit : ㎛ Unit : ㎛

Pitch Circle Pitch Circle

diameter of roller G3 G2 G1 diameter of roller G3 G2 G1
(dp)(mm) (dp)(mm)
Over Below Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Over Below Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
18 30 -8 0 0 15 15 35 355 400 -15 0 30 120 120 210
30 50 -8 0 0 25 25 50 400 450 -20 0 30 130 130 230
50 80 -10 0 0 30 30 60 450 500 -20 0 30 130 130 250
80 120 -10 0 0 40 40 70 500 560 -20 0 30 150 150 280
120 140 -10 0 0 40 40 80 560 630 -20 0 40 170 170 310
140 160 -10 0 0 40 40 90 630 710 -20 0 40 190 190 350
160 180 -10 0 0 50 50 100 710 800 -30 0 40 210 210 390
180 200 -10 0 0 50 50 110 800 900 -30 0 40 230 230 430
200 225 -10 0 0 60 60 120 900 1000 -30 0 50 260 260 480
225 250 -10 0 0 60 60 130 1000 1120 -30 0 60 290 290 530
250 280 -15 0 0 80 80 150 1120 1250 -30 0 60 320 320 580
280 315 -15 0 30 100 100 170 1250 1400 -30 0 70 350 350 630
315 355 -15 0 30 110 110 190

Table 22. Radial clearance of CA series

Unit : ㎛

Pitch Circle diameter of roller (dp)(mm) G3 G2

Over Below Min. Max. Min. Max.

50 80 -8 0 0 15

80 120 -8 0 0 15

120 140 -8 0 0 15

140 160 -8 0 0 15

160 180 -10 0 0 20

180 200 -10 0 0 20

200 225 -10 0 0 20

Crossed Roller Bearing 131

B Crossed Roller Bearing

14 Dimension of Crossed Roller Bearing

1. CB series
- Standard type, inner ring rotating outer ring separable structure

Oil inlet

Unit : ㎜
Major dimension Assembly Basic Load
Mass
Bore Oil inlet size Rated(Radial)
Part No. I/D O/D PCD W
diameter
d D dp B B1 r min C C0
a b ds Dh kg
kN kN
20 CB 2008 20 36 27 8 2 0.8 0.5 23.5 30.5 3.23 3.1 0.04
25 CB 2508 25 41 32 8 2 0.8 0.5 28.5 35.5 3.63 3.83 0.05
30 CB 3010 30 55 41.5 10 2.5 1 0.6 37 47 7.35 8.36 0.12
35 CB 3510 35 60 46.5 10 2.5 1 0.6 41 51.5 7.64 9.12 0.13
40 CB 4010 40 65 51.5 10 2.5 1 0.6 47.5 57.5 8.33 10.6 0.16
45 CB 4510 45 70 56.5 10 2.5 1 0.6 51 61.5 8.62 11.3 0.17
50 CB 5013 50 80 64 13 2.5 1.6 0.6 57.4 72 16.7 20.9 0.27
60 CB 6013 60 90 74 13 2.5 1.6 0.6 68 82 18 24.3 0.3
70 CB 7013 70 100 84 13 2.5 1.6 0.6 78 92 19.4 27.7 0.35
80 CB 8016 80 120 98 16 3 1.6 0.6 91 111 30.1 42.1 0.7
90 CB 9016 90 130 108 16 3 1.6 1 98 118 31.4 45.3 0.75
CB 10016 140 119.3 16 3.5 1.6 1 109 129 31.7 48.6 0.83
100 100
CB 10020 150 123 20 3.5 1.6 1 113 133 33.1 50.9 1.45
CB 11012 135 121.8 12 2.5 1 0.6 117 127 12.5 24.1 0.4
110 CB 11015 110 145 126.5 15 3.5 1.6 0.6 122 136 23.7 41.5 0.75
CB 11020 160 133 20 3.5 1.6 1 120 143 34 54 1.56
CB 12016 150 134.2 16 3.5 1.6 0.6 127 141 24.2 43.2 0.72
120 120
CB 12025 180 148.7 25 3.5 2 1.5 133 164 66.9 100 2.62
1N ≒ 0.102kgf

132 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Unit : ㎜

Major dimension Assembly Basic Load

Mass

Crossed Roller Bearing

Bore Oil inlet size Rated(Radial)
Part No. I/D O/D PCD W
diameter
d D dp B B1 r min C C0
a b ds Dh kg
kN kN
CB 13015 160 144.5 15 3.5 1.6 0.6 137 152 25 46.7 0.72
130 130
CB 13025 190 158 25 3.5 2 1.5 143 174 69.5 107 2.82
CB 14016 175 154.8 16 2.5 1.6 1 147 162 25.9 50.1 1
140 140
CB 14025 200 168 25 3.5 2 1.5 154 185 74.8 121 2.96
CB 15013 180 164 13 2.5 1.6 0.6 157 172 27 53.5 0.68
150 CB 15025 150 210 178 25 3.5 2 1.5 164 194 76.8 128 3.16
CB 15030 230 188 30 4.5 3 1.5 173 211 100 156 5.3
160 CB 16025 160 220 188.6 25 3.5 2 1.5 173 204 81.7 135 3.14
170 CB 17020 170 220 191 20 3.5 1.6 1.5 184 198 29 62.1 2.21
180 CB 18025 180 240 210 25 3.5 2 1.5 195 225 84 143 3.44
190 CB 19025 190 240 211.9 25 3.5 1.6 1 202 222 41.7 82.9 2.99
CB 20025 260 230 25 3.5 2 2 215 245 84.2 157 4
200 CB 20030 200 280 240 30 4.5 3 2 221 258 114 200 6.7
CB 20035 295 247.7 35 5 3 2 225 270 151 252 9.6
220 CB 22025 220 280 250.1 25 3.5 2 2 235 265 92.3 171 4.1
240 CB 24025 240 300 269 25 3.5 2 2.5 256 281 68.3 145 4.5
CB 25025 310 277.5 25 3.5 2 2.5 265 290 69.3 150 5
250 CB 25030 250 330 287.5 30 4.5 3 2.5 269 306 126 244 8.1
CB 25040 355 300.7 40 6 3.5 2.5 275 326 195 348 14.8
CB 30025 360 328 25 3.5 2 2.5 315 340 76.3 178 5.9
300 CB 30035 300 395 345 35 5 3 2.5 322 368 183 367 13.4
CB 30040 405 351.6 40 6 3.5 2.5 326 377 212 409 17.2
350 CB 35020 350 400 373.4 20 3.5 1.6 2.5 363 383 54.1 143 3.9
CB 40035 480 440.3 35 5 3 2.5 422 459 156 370 14.5
400 400
CB 40040 510 453.4 40 6 3.5 2.5 428 479 241 531 23.5
450 CB 45025 450 500 474 25 3.5 1.6 1 464 484 61.7 182 6.6
CB 50025 550 524.2 25 3.5 1.6 1 514 534 65.5 201 7.3
500 CB 50040 500 600 548.8 40 6 3 2.5 526 572 239 607 26
CB 50050 625 561.6 50 6 3.5 2.5 536 587 267 653 41.7
600 CB 60040 600 700 650 40 6 3 3 627 673 264 721 29
700 CB 70045 700 815 753.5 45 6 3 3 731 777 281 836 46
800 CB 80070 800 950 868.1 70 6 4 4 836 900 468 1330 105
900 CB 90070 900 1050 969 70 6 4 4 937 1001 494 1490 120
1N ≒ 0.102kgf

Crossed Roller Bearing 133

B Crossed Roller Bearing

2. CH series
- High stiffness, inner & outer ring integrated structure

Oil inlet Oil inlet

Unit : ㎜
Major dimension Assembly Basic Load
Mass
Bore Oil inlet size Rated(Radial)
Part No. I/D O/D PCD W
diameter
d D dp B r min C C0
d1 ds Dh kg
kN kN
20 CH 42 20 70 41.5 12 3.1 0.6 37 47 7.35 8.35 0.29
35 CH 66 35 95 66 15 3.1 0.6 59 74 17.5 22.3 0.62
55 CH 85 55 120 85 15 3.1 0.6 79 93 20.3 29.5 1
CH 124(G)
80 80 165 124 22 3.1 1 114 134 33.1 50.9 2.6
CH 124X
CH 148(G)
90 90 210 147.5 25 3.1 1.5 133 162 49.1 76.8 4.9
CH 148X
CH 178(G)
115 115 240 178 28 3.1 1.5 161 195 80.3 135 6.8
CH 178X
CH 228(G)
160 160 295 227.5 35 6 2 208 246 104 173 11.4
CH 228X
CH 297(G)
210 210 380 297.3 40 6 2.5 272 320 156 281 21.3
CH 297X
CH 445(G)
350 350 540 445.4 45 6 2.5 417 473 222 473 35.4
CH 445X
1N ≒ 0.102kgf

134 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Crossed Roller Bearing

Unit : ㎜
Inner ring Inner ring
Bore
dia- Part No.
meter PCD 1 Fixing hole PCD 2 Fixing hole

20 CH 42 28 6-M3 penetrated 57 10-ø5.5 penetrated, ø9.5 counter bore, depth 5.4

35 CH 66 45 8-M4 penetrated 83 8-ø4.5 penetrated, ø8 counter bore, depth 4.4
55 CH 85 65 8-M5 penetrated 105 8-ø5.5 penetrated, ø9.5 counter bore, depth 5.4
CH 124(G) 10-ø5.5 penetrated, ø9.5 counter bore, depth 5.4
80 97 148 10-ø5.5 penetrated, ø9.5 counter bore, depth 5.4
CH 124X 10-M5 penetrated
CH 148(G) 12-ø9 penetrated, ø14 counter bore, depth 8.6
90 112 187 12-ø9 penetrated, ø14 counter bore, depth 8.6
CH 148X 12-M8penetrated
CH 178(G) 12-ø9 penetrated, ø14 counter bore, depth 8.6
115 139 217 12-ø9 penetrated, ø14 counter bore, depth 8.6
CH 178X 12-M8 penetrated
CH 228(G) 12-ø11 penetrated, ø17.5 counter bore, depth 10.8
160 184 270 12-ø11 penetrated, ø17.5 counter bore, depth 10.8
CH 228X 12-M10 penetrated
CH 297(G) 16-ø14 penetrated, ø20 counter bore, depth 13
210 240 350 16-ø14 penetrated, ø20 counter bore, depth 13
CH 297X 16-M12 penetrated
CH 445(G) 24-ø14 penetrated, ø20 counter bore, depth 13
350 385 505 24-ø14 penetrated, ø20 counter bore, depth 13
CH 445X 24-M12 penetrated
1N ≒ 0.102kgf

Crossed Roller Bearing 135

B Crossed Roller Bearing

3. CA series
- Slim type, inner ring rotating outer ring separable structure

Unit : ㎜

Major dimension Assembly Basic Load

Mass
Bore Oil inlet size Rated(Radial)
Part No. I/D O/D PCD W r
diameter ds Dh C C0
d D dp B B1 a b min kg
max min kN kN
50 CA 5008 50 66 57 8 2 0.8 0.5 53.5 60.5 5.1 7.19 0.08
50 CA 6008 60 76 67 8 2 0.8 0.5 63.5 70.5 5.68 8.68 0.09
70 CA 7008 70 86 77 8 2 0.8 0.5 73.5 80.5 5.98 9.8 0.1
80 CA 8008 80 96 87 8 2 0.8 0.5 83.5 90.5 6.37 11.3 0.11
90 CA 9008 90 106 97 8 2 0.8 0.5 93.5 100.5 6.76 12.4 0.12
100 CA 10008 100 116 107 8 2 0.8 0.5 103.5 110.5 7.15 13.9 0.14
110 CA 11008 110 126 117 8 2 0.8 0.5 113.5 120.5 7.45 15 0.15
120 CA 12008 120 136 127 8 2 0.8 0.5 123.5 130.5 7.84 16.5 0.17
130 CA 13008 130 146 137 8 2 0.8 0.5 133.5 140.5 7.94 17.6 0.18
140 CA 14008 140 156 147 8 2 0.8 0.5 143.5 150.5 8.33 19.1 0.19
150 CA 15008 150 166 157 8 2 0.8 0.5 153.5 160.5 8.82 20.6 0.2
160 CA 16013 160 186 172 13 2.5 1.6 0.8 165 179 23.3 44.9 0.59
170 CA 17013 170 196 182 13 2.5 1.6 0.8 175 189 23.5 46.5 0.64
180 CA 18013 180 206 192 13 2.5 1.6 0.8 185 199 24.5 49.8 0.68
190 CA 19013 190 216 202 13 2.5 1.6 0.8 195 209 24.9 51.5 0.69
200 CA 20013 200 226 212 13 2.5 1.6 0.8 205 219 25.8 54.7 0.71

136 Crossed Roller Bearing

WON ST CO., LTD.

15 Cautions when handling Crossed Roller Bearing

Crossed Roller Bearing

1. Insufficient stiffness of the parts to be assembled causes the stress concentrated on contact surface
between orbital plane and roller, thereby weakening the performance of the bearing. At the environ-
ment with greater moment, housing stiffness and bolt strength shall be thoroughly evaluated.

2. Special synthetic rubber and resin are included in the parts of Crossed Roller Bearing and thus please
contact WON ST when using at 80℃ or higher temperature

3. Dimensional tolerance shall be in accordance with the requirements to ensure inner & out ring will be
tightly contacted with the sides

4. Crossed roller bearing is vulnerable to impact by falling or striking and thus when exposed to impact,
check carefully if any functional defect is found despite of no damage is visually found

5. Foreign material once penetrated into the bearing may cause the damage to function and thus protec-
tion the bearing from dust or cutting chip shall be provided.

6. Bearing when shipped out is filled with lithium grease and thus it may be used without filling grease.
Oil inlet shall be designed to inject oil into inner & outer ring. Lubricant shall be injected at least every
6 months irrespective of working hours.

7. Additive or other lubricant needs to be avoided if possible

8. Please contact WON ST when using at particular environment with high impact or vibration load, clean
room, vibration or low / high temperature

Crossed Roller Bearing 137

WON ST CO., LTD.

Ball Spline
Contents

Ball Spline
1 Ball Spline 6 Lubrication and contamination prevention
of Ball Spline•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 150
1. Structures & Features•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 140
2. Transmission of High Torque • • • • • • • • • 140
3. High load capacity and long life•• • • • • • 140
4. Zero Gap• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 140 7 Assembly •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 151

8 Caution in Use •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 151

4 Pre-load of Ball Spline • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 146

5 Accuracy •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 147

Ball Spline
C Ball Spline

1 Ball Spline
1. Structures & Features
WON Ball Spline is an innovative linear motion system, in that balls accommodated in the spline nut
transmit torque while linearly moving on precision-ground raceways on a spline shaft.
Furthermore, one significant difference against the usual ball bush is that a single spline nut can exert
preload. As a result of this ability, the Ball Spline is well suited for using under severe service conditions
involving vibration and the application of impact loads, and in locations that require highly precise posi-
tioning and high-speed operation.
The Ball Spline has two loading ball rows to be arranged so that ball rows in the 2 grooves at 180°∆ to
be precisely ground.

2. Transmission of High Torque

The Ball Spline has grooves to be very precisely ground in a round type closely to a ball diameter so that,
if torque load is put over spline shaft and spline nut 2 rows are evenly put in the direction of the torque
load within the 2 rows with load. The rotation center is automatically determined.

3. High load capacity and long life

The Ball Spline can be made compact, and besides stable safety & longer life should be guaranteed in
spite of overload and torsional load.

4. Zero Gap
The Ball Spline minimizes clearance in the rotational direction Gap. Pre-loading on a spline nut can
reduce Gap to zero if necessary, there by increasing rigidity.

Spline Nut Body

Unload ball track

Unload ball track Spline Nut Body

Dust Seal
Retainer & Cover

Spline Shaft
Load ball row Retainer & Cover

Load ball row

Dust Seal
Dust Seal

Fig 1. Feature of Compact Ball Spline

Compact - 2 rows and 4 points contact type

Ball Ball Spline - Simple structure and very compact
Spline Linear - 4 rows and 2 points contact type
Ball Spline - Angular contact type and high load rating of radial direction and torque direction

140 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

2 Selection of Ball Spline

1. Overview
To select Ball Spline, most of all identify detailed requirements and prioritize the requirements to select
the Ball Spline suitable for the service conditions.

2. Procedure

Ball Spline
1 Identify service equipment, maintenance structure, installation space, assembly status,
conditions functional requirements, service conditions

2 Select the type Select the appropriate type by considering motion condition, load level,
of Ball Spline rigidity, friction, and assembly

3 Select the model Determine the model number and the quantity of nut by considering the
number of Ball Spline space and load

4 Calculate load Calculate the load in vertical and horizontal directions and moment

5 Calculate Calculate each load applied to the nut and shaft by converting it into
equivalent load equivalent load

6 Calculate mean load Calculate each load applied to the nut, shaft and variable load during
deceleration by converting them into mean load

7 Calculate static Calculate the static safety factor identified by basic load rating and max.
safety factor equivalent load and check if it fits for service conditions

8 Calculate life Check if it fits for service conditions by calculating load rating and life

9 Review preload Select the pre-load and clearance suitable for service conditions
& clearance

10 Determine the Determine the class of precision required by Ball Spline while driving or
class of precision rotating

11 Lubrication, Select lubricant suitable for the environment using grease, oil, and special
grease lubrication and select seal for dust proof / determine the method
dust proof, surface handling of surface handing for rust prevention and low dust raise
12 Complete selection Complete the decision of final specifications of Ball Spline

Ball Spline 141

C Ball Spline

3 Life Calculation
1. Life
If external load is applied to Ball Spline while driving, fatigue fracture occurs by stress created as load
is repeatedly applied to the raceway surface and rolling elements, and flaking-peeling off in scale-like
flakes arises. A total driving distance until flaking occurs due to tinitial fatigue fracture is the life of a linear
motion guide.

•Defects may occur in Ball Spline earlier than when flaking normally occurs due to wear or fatigue in
the following cases:

a. Excess load by the imprecise assembly following a difference in temperature or tolerance

b. If Ball Spline is contaminated with foreign substance
c. Driving with insufficiention
d. Reciprocating motion in a very short distance in the form of vibration or wave during the halt or drive
e. Excessive load to Ball Spline
f. Deformation of plastic end-plate

2. Rating fatigue life(L)

Generally Ball Spline does not always have same life even though the products are manufactured in the
same way because of the difference in scattering of way material’s original fatigue. For this reason, the
reference value of life is defined as the rating fatigue life which is a total driving distance that flaking does
not occur in 90% of Ball Spilne in a group when having them run under the same conditions by grouping
multiple Ball Splines with same specifications into a group.

L : Basic life time (km)

Radial load rating
C : Basic dynamic load torque (N)
T : Basic dynamic torque (Nㆍm)
PC : Calculated load (N)
PT : Calculated torque (Nㆍm)
Torque load rating fH : Hardness factor(refer to Pic 4)
fT : Temperature factor(refer to Pic 5)
fC : Contact factor(refer to table 1)
fW : Load factor(refer to table 2)

Lh : Life time (h)

ℓs : Stroke length (m)
n1 : number of round-trip times (min-1)
per minute

142 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

• Hardness factor (fH)

To realize the best performance of Ball Spline,
the proper hardness and depth should be main-

Hardness factor (fH)

tained between the nut contacting a rolling ele-
ment (ball) and the raceway surface of shaft.
WON Ball Spline has HRC58-64 surface hard-
ness, so there is no need to consider hard-
ness factor. But if the hardness is lowered than
baseline, Ball Spline’s load capacity decreases,
so hardness factor needs to be reflected in cal-

Ball Spline
culating life.

Rolling surface hardness (HRC)

Figure 2. Hardness factor (fH)

• Temperature factor (fT)

If high temperature over 100 °C is applied to Ball
Spline, temperature factor (fT) needs to be taken
Temperature factor (fT)

into account when selecting Ball Spline. WON

Ball Spline must be used at less than 80°C But
you have to use it at over 80°C , please use a
high-temp Ball Spline -WON ST’s specially cus-
tomized product.

Rolling surface temperature ℃

Figure 3. Temperature factor (fT)

Note) In ambient temperature of over 80, materi

als for seal, end plate, and support plate should be
changed to the specifications for high temperature.

• Contact factor (fC) Table 2. Contact factor (fc)

If over two nuts of Ball Spline are closely assem No. of nuts contacted Contact factor (fc)
bled, since uniform load may not be applied to
nuts due to difference among mounting surfaces, 2 0.81
you have to multiply basic static load rating (C) 3 0.72
and basic dynamic load rating (Co) by contact
factor shown in Table 2. 4 0.66
5 0.61
Over 6 0.6
Common use 1.0

Ball Spline 143

C Ball Spline

• Load factor (fw)

Generally the static load applied to the nut of Ball Spline can be calculated by formula. But the load
applied to the nut while running the machine tends to come from vibration or impact. Therefore, you
have to consider load factor (fw) shown in Table 3 for the vibration or impact load during the speedy
running of the machine. It can be calculated by dividing the basic dynamic load rating of Ball Spline by
load factor (fw).

Table 3. Load factor (fw)

External condition Service conditions Load factor(fw)
There is no external vibration or impact due to the
Low 1.0 ~ 1.3
smooth running of machine at mild speed.
There is moderate external vibration or impact due
Moderate 1.2 ~ 1.5
to the running of machine at low speed.
There is strong vibration or impact due to the running
Big 1.5 ~ 2.0
of machine at fast speed.
There is strong vibration or impact due to the
Very big 2.0 ~ 4.0
running of machine at very fast speed.

3. Static safety factor(fs)

Ball Spline cannot be gotten good movement caused by sectional permanent deformation on a ball and
race way if heavy load or impact load act on it. In general, a limit in use depends on the working condi-
tion and the requirement of ball spline. In this case, static safety factor is obtained using the following
equation and the general values shown in table 4.
fs : Static safety factor
CO : Basic static load rating, (N)
TO : Static rated toque, (Nㆍm)
Pro : Applied load (N)
Pto : Torque (Nㆍm)
Table 4. Static safety factor (fS)
Used environment fS
Vibration & impact 3~5
High running 2~4
General movement 1~3

4. Basic dynamic load rating(C)

Basic dynamic load rating means a load in regular size of stop diameter direction with the direction which
travels at 50 x 10³m without material’s damage(spalling or flaking) by 90% of fatigue when a group of
anguler Ball Splines are individually travelled.
Each value of basic dynamic load rating (C) is stated in the catalogue. (Refer to Fig. 4)

144 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

5. Basic static load rating(Co)

Basic static load rating defines a static load to be given a regular contact stress in the middle of contact-
ing portion both of a rolling body with the maximum load and a track. (Refer to Fig. 4)

6. Basic dynamic rating torque(T)

Load rating torque means a torque in regular size with the direction which travels at 50 x 10³m without
material’s damage(spalling or flaking) by 90% of fatigue when a group of anguler Ball Splines are indi-

Ball Spline
vidually travelled. (Refer to Fig. 5)

7. Basic static rating torque(To)ㆍBasic static rating moment(TM)

Basic static torque and static moment is defined as the constant stress in the middle of contacting portion
both of a rolling body and a track under the maximum load when torque and moment (Refer to Fig. 5)
are loaded.(TM) indicated in the dimension table can endure static moment both of 1 and 2 outer nut to
be adhered closely

Static load rating(C), Dynamic load rating(Co) Dynamic torque rating(T), Static torque rating(To)

Tension load(C, Co)

Pressure load(C, Co)

Transverse load

Revised from
C, Co figure

figure 4. Load rating and load effect direction figure 5. Load effect direction of Torque rating

Compact Ball Spline must be used with their load rating corrected in accordance to the load direction.
The basic dynamic load rating and basic static load rating shown in the dimension table should be cor-
rected to values in Table below.
(Basic dynamic rating torque, Basic static rating torque & Basic static rating moment are corrected using
the same multiple.)

Basic dynamic load rating Basic static load rating

Size
Downward Upward Lateral Downward Upward Lateral
4 ~ 12 C C 1.73 C0 C0 C0 1.73 C0
15 ~ 40 C C 1.19 C0 C0 C0 1.19 C0

Ball Spline 145

C Ball Spline

4 Pre-load of Ball Spline

Pre-load
WON’s angular Ball Spline can be pre-loaded in case that rigidity and high positioning repeatability in
rotational irection are necessary. The average of pre-load is 1/2~1/3 of load, but the amount of pre-load
is necessary to be selected with consideration of travel life of Ball Spline in case that vibration load or
pulsating load is added, and especially high rigidity is necessary.
WON’s angular Ball Spline serves with calculated pre-load based on the load in the circumferential
direction. It is indicated according to the method of part number format. We serve the standard pre-load
unless there is customer’s special requirement/indication. Please inquire to WON in case of the pre-load
exceeding light pre-load.

Table 5. Pre-load & Application

Type of pre-load Symbol Amount of pre-load Application
Clearance CL 0 ~ +
(1)
•Machines/Equipments for definitely simple operation
•General machines/equipments
Standard CM 0 (2) ~ -
•Machines/Equipments to need small motion resistance

•Machines/Equipments to need rigidity

Light preload CT 0.02Co •Machines/Equipments for big vibration/impact load
•Machines/Equipments with big moment load or pulsating load

Note(1) Zero or a little of clearance.

Note(2) Zero or a little of pre-load.
Remark) Clearance applies to WSP(F)(K) 4.Light pre-load does not apply to WSP(F)(K) 4

146 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

5 Accuracy
WON’s angular Ball Spline has the accuracy of KS B 1422(JIS B 1193). It is divided into 3 grades-nor-
mal (no symbol), high(H) and Precision(P), and the details is shown in the Table 1~3. The symbol of the
grades is marked by the arrangement of the part-numbers. The figures of the tables also include the
precision of the case that the shaft-ends are processed(the portions both of supporting and parts mount-
ing in Fig.2) can help even special requirements/inquires for other precision. The measuring method of
accuracy is shown in Table 6.

Ball Spline
Table 6. The torsion of Ball Spline

Torsion (MAX)
Accuracy grade
Normal grade High(H) Precision(P)
Tolerance 33㎛/100㎜ 13㎛/100㎜ 6㎛/100㎜

Figure 6. The several parts of accuracy measurement of Ball Spline

Ball Spline 147

C Ball Spline

Figure 7. The precision of each part on Ball Spline

Unit : ㎛

WSP 4 WSP 5 WSP6 WSP 8 WSP 10 WSP 12 - WSP 15 WSP 20 WSP 25 WSP 30 WSP 40
Part No.
- WLS 8 WLS 10 - WLS 13 WLS 16 WLS 20 WLS 25 WLS 30 WLS 40
①
Normal 33 41 46 53 62
torsion to radial direction on installation place

High
14 17 19 22 25
H
datum plane

Precision
8 10 12 13 15
P

A ②
Normal 22 27 33 39
vertical angle degree of spline

I
C

High
9 6 13 16
H

Precision
6 8 9 11
P

③
vertical angle degree of flange face to the center line of spline shaft

Normal 27 33 39 46
datum plane

A High
11 13 16 19
I H
C
B
D
Precision
8 9 11 13
P

148 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

Figure 8. Torsion to radial direction on the center line of Ball Spline

Unit : ㎛

Over - 200 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250

Shaft (mm)
Below 200 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600

WSP 4 Normal 72 133 185 236 - - - - -

WSP 5
WSP 6 High
46 89 128 163 - - - - -

Ball Spline
WSP 8 H

WLS 8 Precision
26 57 82 108 - - - - -
P

Normal 59 83 103 123 151 190 - - -

WSP 10
WSP 12 High
36 54 68 82 102 130 - - -
H
WLS 10
Precision
20 32 41 51 65 85 - - -
P

WSP 15 Normal 56 71 83 95 112 137 170 - -

WSP 20
High
34 45 53 62 75 92 115 - -
WLS 13 H
WLS 16
WLS 20 Precision
18 25 31 38 46 58 75 - -
P

Normal 53 58 70 78 88 103 124 151 -

WSP 25
WSP 30
High
32 39 44 50 57 68 83 102 -
H
WLS 25
WLS 30 Precision
18 21 25 29 34 42 52 65 -
P

Normal 53 58 63 68 74 84 97 114 139

WSP 40
High
32 36 39 43 47 54 63 76 93
H
WLS 40
Precision
16 19 21 24 27 32 38 47 -
P

Ball Spline 149

C Ball Spline

6 Lubrication and contamination prevention of Ball Spline

Ball Splines are taken care of by all mineral oils and anti-corrosive with affinity. Grease should be recom-
mended for anti-corrosion as it can be lubricated by oil or grease, grease-lubrication
additionally gives another sealing effect, and it can be easily adhered inside of Ball Spline.
WON’s Ball Spline is taken good care of protection against dust using by high quality lithium-soap
group of grease with extreme pressure lubricant. Ball Spline with oil-hole to be machined on the
nut is used for supplying grease.

bellows cover

Figure 7. contamination-proof item example

Figure 8. refueling item example

150 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

7 Assembly
Fitting
WON’s Angular Ball Spline generally has a stop fit (J7)
in fitting the nut and the housing.
In case that accuracy & rigidity are not so necessary, a
clearance fit (H7) is used.
Insertion of the spline nut

Ball Spline
When a spline nut is inserted into a housing, it can affect
to the operation. Please use a tool for installation and
insert it so as not to give any impact to retainer. (fig. 9)

Insertion of the spline shaft

When a spline shaft is inserted into a spline nut, a ball
may come out. So that, it should be inserted after exactly Figure 9.
setting the location of the track slot of the shaft, the row
of balls of the spline nut and the location of the seal.

8 Caution in Use
① WON’s Ball Spline can be used in an environment up to a temperature 120℃, and up to 80℃ for
continuous use. Please inquire to WON for the application exceeding the temperature 80℃
② WON’s Ball Spline has an optimum precision of adjustment at the same portion of both symbols
ofspline shaft and nut. (refer to fig. 10) When ball spline is installed in a machine, it is necessary
to payattention to keeping steering both nut & ball spline, the arrangement of nut and the steering
direction.
③ In case that 2 nuts and more are used per shaft and so 2 keys and more is used on the rotational direction
of outside fixing, the location of nut key ways should be parallel. For this case, please inquire to WON

Figure 10.

Ball Spline 151

C Ball Spline

9 Compact Ball Spline

1. Structure and Feature
The structure of WON Ball Spline is composed of nut and shaft.
Balls are in the nut and gothic arch grooves are on the shaft and balls in the nut roll on the grooves as
linear movement on the shaft grinded precisely.
One nut withstands radial load, moment load and transfers rotation torque to circumferential direction of
shaft. Preload can be adjusted by using the balls assembled between grooves on nut and shaft so this
linear movement system could against high vibrating impact load and suitable for high precise position
decision, high speed movement and longer life time.

2. High torque transfer

The grooves of spline are on the rolling face of nut and shaft which is ground precisely as gothic arch
shape so balls contact with grooves by 4 points. Therefore 2 rows receive same load and transfer turning
force under the condition of turning torque on shaft or nut owing to this kind of structure.

3. High load capacity and Long life

Ball Spline has compact structure but the rolling faces of nut and shaft meet ball, the rolling element
by face contact. So it can sustain the rated load 10 times more than ball bush in the condition of same
diameter and assure longer life time. It’s very advantageous for miniaturization of facility and support
radial load, moment load and overhang load.

Spline Nut Body

Unload ball track

Retainer & Cover

Load ball row

Dust Seal
Spline Shaft

Figure 11. The structure of Compact Ball Spline

152 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

Classification Type Type & Features

WSP Ball Spline nut has a machined key

groove so that can fix exactly the position
WSPL in rotational direction.

Round

Ball Spline
Type

WSPT It has the neat apperance as well as

the stable strength according as retainer
WSPTO is inserted into the cover.

WSPF It has enough strength as it is all-in-

one both of flange and the body of
WSPFL Ball Spline nut.Easier installation with
round flange.

WSPK
Flange Easier and more compact installation
Type WSPKL with square flange.

WSPTF It has enough strength as it is all-in-

one both of flange and the body of Ball
WSPTFO Spline nut.
Easier installation with round flange.

Ball Spline 153

C Ball Spline

WSP Type
Examples of model number formation

Q’ty of Nut Part No. Spline-shaft diameter

Q’ty of Nut Part No. Spline-shaft diameter

Unit : mm
Main dimensions
Part No. Outer Allowable Length Max.
Allowable Allowable
Diameter Tolerance L1 W Tolerance t ℓ d Tolerance
D L length
0 0
WSPTO 16 31 50 3.5 2 17.5 16 200 300 400 1000
-0.013 +0.018 -0.017
0 0 0 300 400 500
WSPTO 20 35 63 4 2.5 29 20 1000
-0.016 -0.020 600

Basic load ratings rating torque Static load rating moment Mass
Part No. C Co T To TM Nut Shaft
N N N• m N• m N• m g g/100mm
67.6
WSPTO 16 7060 12600 31.4 34.3 165 160
393
118
WSPTO 20 10200 17800 56.9 55.9 225 250
700
1N≒0.102kgf
Note(1) As for the Static load rating moment TM, the upside figures are for the value for one nut and the downside
figure are for the values for 2 nuts to be closely adhered.

170 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

WSPTFO Type
Examples of model number formation

Q’ty of Nut Part No. Spline-shaft diameter

Ball Spline
S:Solid, H:Hollow Spline-shaft overall length
Preload : CT(Tight), CM(Middle), CL(Loose)
Accuracy symbol-Nomal(No symbol), High(H), Precision(P)
SUJ2(No symbol), Stainless steel(/A)
* When the grease nipple is necessary, please ask WON.

Unit : mm
Main dimensions
Part No. Outer Allowable Length Max.
Allowable
Diameter Tolerance L1 D1 T pcd XxYxZ d Tolerance
D L length
0 45 x 8 x 0 200 300
WSPTFO 16 31 50 51 7 40 16 1000
-0.013 4.4 -0.017 400
0 5.5 x 9.5 0 300 400
WSPTFO 20 35 63 58 9 45 20 1000
-0.016 x 5.4 -0.020 500 600

Basic load ratings rating torque Static load rating moment Mass
Part No. C Co T To TM Nut Shaft
N N N• m N• m N• m g g/100mm
67.6
WSPTFO 16 7060 12600 31.4 34.3 165 160
393
WSPTFO 118
10200 17800 56.9 55.9 225 250
20 700
1N≒0.102kgf
Note(1) As for the Static load rating moment TM, the upside figures are for the value for one nut and the downside
figure are for the values for 2 nuts to be closely adhered.

Ball Spline 171

C Ball Spline

10 Linear Ball Spline

1. Structure and feature
WON Linear Ball Spline is composed of shaft and nut both has groove as rolling raceway. Retainer, seal,
balls are in spline nut which design make it move smoothly.
2. High load capacity and Long life
Raceway is ground as R shape almost similar to the diameter of ball so the contact area is wide and high
load capacity and long life could be achieved.

3. Precise torque transfer

The raceway groove of shaft and nut controls balls with optimal contact angle so torque can be trans-
ferred by just 1 axis. And we can increase the load capacity or the degree of precise positioning decision
by zeroised the gap of rotation direction which conveys preload.

4. High speed movement, High speed rotation

Cylinder is compact and the balance is good so it’s good at high speed movement and high speed
rotation.
5. Product classification
There are 8 sizes from 8 to 40 and 2 types of nut shape, cylinder type(WLS), flange type(WLSF).
* please contact WON if you need one with other raw material.

6. Easy for further processing

WON Linear Ball Spline has groove raceway for ball rolling on round shaft so it’s easy for diverse further
processing and popular on varied industrial fields.

Unload ball track

Spline Nut Body

Dust Seal

Spline Shaft
Retainer & Cover

Load ball row

Figure 12. The structure of Linear Ball Spline

172 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

Classifica-
Type Types & Feature
tion

Ball Spline nut has a machined key

Round groove so that can fix exactly the
type position in rotational direction.

Ball Spline
It has enough strength as it is all-in-one
Flange both of flange and the body of Ball Spline
type nut. Easier installation with round flange.

※ WON Linear Ball Spline can be selected for use and seal is in all type of nut as a standard component.

Ball Spline 173

C Ball Spline

WLS Type
Examples of model number formation

Q’ty of Nut Part No. Spline-shaft diameter

Main dimensions
Part No. Outer Allowable Allowable Allowable Allowable
Diameter Tolerance L1 Tolerance W Tolerance t ℓ O d Tolerance
D
0
WLS 8 16 25 2.5 1.2 10.5 1.5 8
-0.011 0
+0.014 -0.015
WLS 10 21 33 3 1.5 13 1.5 10
0 0
-0.013 0
WLS 13 24 36 3 1.5 15 1.5 13
-0.2 0
-0.018
WLS 16 31 50 3.5 2 17.5 2 16

WLS 20 35 63 4 2.5 29 2 20
0
-0.016 +0.018 0
WLS 25 42 71 4 2.5 36 3 25
0 -0.021
0
WLS 30 47 80 4 2.5 42 3 30
-0.3
0 0
WLS 40 64 100 6 3.5 52 4 40
-0.019 -0.025

174 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

Ball Spline
Unit : mm
Basic load ratings rating torque Static load rating moment Mass
C Co T To TM Nut Shaft Part No.
N N N• m N• m N• m g g/100mm

1,450 2,870 2.1 3.7 7.4 23 38 WLS 8

2,730 5,070 4.4 8.2 18.0 54 60 WLS 10

2,670 4,890 21 39.2 13.7 70 100 WLS 13

6,120 11,200 60 110 46 150 150 WLS 16

8,900 16,300 105 194 110 220 240 WLS 20

12,800 23,400 189 346 171 330 370 WLS 25

18,600 23,200 307 439 181 360 540 WLS 30

30,800 37,500 647 934 358 950 960 WLS 40

1N≒0.102kgf

Ball Spline 175

C Ball Spline

WLSF Type
Examples of model number formation

Q’ty of Nut Part No. Spline-shaft diameter

Main dimensions
Part No. Outer Allowable Allowable Allowable
Diameter Tolerance L1 Tolerance D1 T PCD XxYxZ L2 o d Tolerance
D
0 3.4 x 6.5 x
WLSF 8 16 25 32 5 24 2.5 2.5 8
-0.011 3.3 0
-0.015
WLSF 10 21 33 42 6 32 4.5 x 8 x 4.4 3 3 10
0
-0.013 0
WLSF 13 24 36 43 7 33 4.5 x 8 x 4.4 3 3 13
-0.2 0
-0.018
WLSF 16 31 50 50 7 40 4.5 x 8 x 4.4 3.5 3.5 16
5.5 x 9.5 x
WLSF 20 35 63 58 9 45 4 4 20
0 5.4
-0.016 5.5 x 9.5 x 0
WLSF 25 42 71 65 9 52 4 4 25
5.4 -0.021
0 6.6 x 11 x
WLSF 30 47 80 75 10 60 4 4 30
-0.3 6.5
0 0
WLSF 40 64 100 100 14 82 9 x 14 x 8.6 6 6 40
-0.019 -0.025

176 Ball Spline

WON ST CO., LTD.

Ball Spline
Unit : mm
Basic load ratings rating torque Static load rating moment Mass
C Co T To TM Nut Shaft Part No.
N N N• m N• m N• m g g/100mm

1,450 2,870 2.1 3.7 7.4 42 38 WLSF 8

2,730 5,070 4.4 8.2 18.0 94 60 WLSF 10

2,670 4,890 21 39.2 13.7 100 100 WLSF 13

6,120 11,200 60 110 46 200 150 WLSF 16

8,900 16,300 105 194 110 330 240 WLSF 20

12,800 23,400 189 346 171 450 370 WLSF 25

18,600 23,200 307 439 181 550 540 WLSF 30

18,600 37,500 674 934 358 1,410 960 WLSF 40

1N≒0.102kgf

Ball Spline 177

WON ST CO., LTD.

Cross Roller Guide Way

Contents

1 Cross Roller Guide Way

Cross Roller Guide Way

2 Anti-Creep Cross Roller Guide Way

3 Types & Features •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 182

5 Safe working load & Service life •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 184

7 Accuracy of Mounting surface •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 187

8 Installation Method •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 187

9 Lubrication & Contamination Prevention •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 189

10 Caution in Use •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 190

Cross Roller Guide Way

D Cross Roller Guide Way

1 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON’s Cross Roller Guide Way consists of the precisely ground raceway and the roller cage.The roller cage,
in which precision roller are incorporated at right angle to one another, is fitted into to 90 v-grooved raceway
machined on the race rail.
WON’s Cross Roller Guide Way is compact linear motion system with high rigidity and high accuracy as a
kind of linear motion bearing with low frictional resistance, tight clearance &non-circulation method by big
rollers with big contact-areas as a rolling body.Therefore, the Cross Roller Guide Way is being applied to a
wide range of equipment, a computer and peripherals, several precision equipments, a tool grinder, auto-
matic lathe machines, electric discharge machines, and slides used in X-ray equipments, to name just a few.

1. Delicate slide, High rigidity & High accuracy

The number of the effective rolling body are many as the rolling body uses precision rollers and it is not circu-
lated(non-circulation) So that, the rigidity is high, the load capacity is big, the fluctuation of frictional resistance
is small and there is not almost the difference between the starting fricitional resistance and the dynamic
fricitional resistance.
Therefore, in spite of delicate sliding, the linear motion can Keep high precise accuracy.

2. Low noise
In Cross Roller Guide Way, a roller is contacted on the surface of the race rail. So that, the noise is low and
rollers have a smooth movement without contact-noise as rollers are supported by a roller cage.

3. Correspondence in load-direction & Zero-clearance

When two roller guides are installed in parallel, the resulting system can bear loads in all directions perpen-
dicular to the rails. Moreover, since a preload can be applied easily, the system can be a highly rigid, nimble
slide mechanism with no clearance.

Stopper Rail
Roller

Roller

Roller Cage Roller Cage

Fig 1. Features

180 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

2 Anti-Creep Cross Roller Guide Way

Anti Creep type Cross Roller Guide Way has anti-creep performance with the extremely high precision de-
gree. It is built in a Rack and Pinion gear into the existing WON Cross Roller Guide Way.

Patent
Roller Pinion Roller Applied
Pinion

Rail

Cross Roller Guide Way

Rack
Cage Rack

WON Anti-Creep Cross Roller Guide Way Construction Plan Anti-Creep Detail Plan

1. Meet the application diversity

It is available to meet the ultra accelerated and reduced speed working condition by anti-creeping performance
on the race rail so it is conveniently applicable to a vertical axis etc.

2. Low Noise and working very smoothly

Plastic Cage is applied to it instead existing Steel Cage so it causes to minimize a noise between rollers and to
work more smoothly and quietly as well.

3. K
eep high load performance by the sound compatibility of assembly di-
mensions between old and new one
Our exclusive technology which the pinion gear wraps the cage roller enables to maintain perfectly compatible
with load rating, stroke,assembly measurement as the number of roller is same with general cross roller
guide way. 1)

Anti-Creep Cross Roller Guide Way An Cross Roller Guide Way

Fig 2. Dimension compatibility
Note 1) The number of roller is not same to No1, No2.

Cross Roller Guide Way 181

D Cross Roller Guide Way

3 Types & Features

Classification Type Feature

WON’s Cross Roller Guide Way con-

sists of the precisely ground raceway
and the roller cage. The roller cage, in
which precision roller are incorporated
at night angle to one another, is fitted
into to 90v-grooved raceway machined
on the race rail.
Guide WRG Guide Way is compact linear
motion system with high rigidity and
high accuracy as a kind of linear motion
bearing with low frictional resistance,
fight clearance & non-cirulation method
by big rollers with big contact areas as a
rolling body.

WRGU Cross roller guide is assembled

between precision table and base
Table
WRGT is compact and strong linear
guide unit.

182 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

4 Accuracy
There are 3 kind of accuracy grades for WON Cross Roller Guide. Normal, High and Precision.

Cross Roller Guide Way

Table1. Accuracy for Race rail. Table2 . Raceway Parallelism to surface to Unit :
Accuracy grade Normal High Precision Accuracy High Precision
grade Normal
Symbol No Rail length (No symbol) (H) (P)
Items Symbol H P
Less than 200
Raceway parallelism to
Refer to Table 2 From 200 to 400
surface &
From 400 to 600
Dimensional tolerance for height E
From 600 to 800
Height E difference among rails
More than 800
Dimensional tolerancefor
width M

Note 1) Difference of Hight ‘E’ applies to 4 rails in-

stalled on the same plane.
Note 2) Please inquire to WON for another dimen-
sions of Cross Roller Guide Way as we do.

Cross Roller Guide Way 183

D Cross Roller Guide Way

5 Safe working load & Service life

The basic load rating CZ, COZ is calculate by the number of running roller(Z) in actual use and basic load
ratings C, Co Per running roller.

Basic dynamic load rating Basic static load rating

The number of effective

roller (Constant)

Rating life means overall running stroke without any material’s damage(spalling or flaking) by 90% of fatigue
when a group of LM System is individually travelled at the same conditions. Basic dynamic load rating is cal-
culated by the rating life. Hence comes the life of Cross Roller Guide Way as the below equation.

L : Basic rating life (km)

C : Basic dynamic load rating (kN)
Pc : Calculated load (kN)
fH : Hardness factor
fT : Temperature factor
fw : Load factor

When the stroke & the number of return are indicated, service life is able to be calculated.

Lh : Service life (hr)

s : Stroke (m)
n1 : The number of return (o.p.m.)

184 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

Table 3. Hardness factor

Material of race rail fH

Carbon steel
Stainless steel

Table 4. Temperature factor

Raceway temperature

Cross Roller Guide Way

Table 5. Load factor

Impact & Vibration Velocity (V) Measured value (G)

No Shock vibration Low speed G≦0.5 1.0 ~ 1.5
from outside V ≦ 15m/min

Small Shock vibration Middle speed 0.5≦G≦1.0 1.0 ~ 1.5

from outside 15 < V ≦ 60m/min

Shock vibration High speed

from outside V > 60m/min 1.0≦G≦2.0 2.0 ~ 3.5

Cross Roller Guide Way 185

D Cross Roller Guide Way

6 Pre-load
In Cross Roller Guide Way, the application of an excessive pre-load may cause dents, shorten the service
life, and lead to similar problems. The mounted torque of Adjust Bolt should be observed while checking the
permissible pre-load levels.(* Adjust Bolt is tightened on the same line with Roller.)

Table 6. Permissible pre-load levels for a row of Roller Cage Unit :

Part No. R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R9
Permissible Pre-load -2 -3 -4 -5 -7 -10

Fig 3. Adjusting pre-load

186 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

7 Accuracy of Mounting surface

To ensure high running accuracy, the rail mounting surface should be finished by grinding or a similar method,
to a degree of equivalent to or greater than that of the Table. See Table 1

8 Installation Method

Cross Roller Guide Way

Table

Bed

Fig 4. Installation Method

1) Press rails ① , ② & ③ firmly against the bed and the table, while correctly positioning the mounting sur-
faces.Firmly tighten the rail-mounting bolts.
2) Temporarily fasten rail ④ to the table and make a sure some space for inserting Roller Cage from the rail ends.
3) Position a dial gauge as shown in Fig. 4. While gently pressing the table, tighten Adjust Bolt uniformly until
there is no slack.Then, attach stoppers to the rail ends, and set the dial gauge to zero.
4) Position Roller Cage at the center of rails as shown in Fig.5 Uniformly tighten Adjust Bolt by using a torque
wrench or the like, until the dial gauge shows the specified displacement. Then, the displacement showing on
the dial gauge is equal to the permissible preload. Fully tighten the mounting bolts within the adjusted area.
5) Slide the table from the right and left and complete the installation by mounting the remaining A djust
Bolt(ⓐ, ⓔ in Fig.4) and the Tightened Bolt. at this displacement in the dial pre-load amount.Tighten the
mounting bolts at the adjusted positions securely.move the table to the side, finish the installation as tight-
ening the remaining adjustment bolts ⓐ, ⓔ in the same way.

Cross Roller Guide Way 187

D Cross Roller Guide Way

Fig 5. Order to bolting

Normally, the adjustment bolts press on the rail.

When high accuracy & rigidity are required, usd a

holding bar.

When extremely high accuracy rigidity are required,

use tapered GIBS 1 & 2.

Fig.6 Adjust Clearance

188 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

9 Lubrication & Contamination Prevention

WON’ s Cross Roller Guide Way(WRGT, WRGU) may be used as the high quality lithium-soap group of
grease cares for it’s lubrication. The same kind of grease is recommended for the supplement. We recom-
mend to attach a cover to protect a cross roller guide way as the below Fig.8 in case that a lot of foreign mat-
ters or dusts enter into a cross roller guide way and it is used in the kind of environment where is big foreign
matter as like cut tips or sand. (Fig.7)

Cross Roller Guide Way

Fig 7.

Cross Roller Guide Way 189

D Cross Roller Guide Way

10 Caution in Use
1. Installation
WON’ s Cross Roller Guide Way should observe the uniform pre-load and the mounting torque. When the
pre-load is adjusted poorly and the accuracy of the supporting plane is low, the motion accuracy deteriorates.
This causes skewing and adversely influences the life.

2. Stopper
Stoppers are provided at the rail ends to prevent cages from falling off. A stopper for the table should be
separately installed in outside.

3. One set of use

In WON’ s Cross Roller Guide Way, one set of WRG type consists of 4 race rails, WRGW type consists of 3
race rails for one set.
The pair reciprocal tolerance between the individual V-grooves is adjusted within one set and so, to combine
the different sets may be a factor to deteriorate the life and the accuracy by reciprocal error. Therefore, install-
ation should be paid attention to these points.

190 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

Roller Cage

Examples of model number formation

Part No. Roller Size

The number of Roller

Cross Roller Guide Way

Unit : mm

Part No. W P

Cross Roller Guide Way 191

D Cross Roller Guide Way

WRG Type
Examples of model number formation

Part No. Roller Size Length of Race rail

Accuracy : Normal(No symbol), High(H), Precision(P)
The number of Roller
* Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & applicaton

Dimensions
Max. No.of
Part No. Stroke Roller
Z

Note 1) 1Set = 4 Race rail + 2 Roller cages + 8 Stoppers.

Note 2) Basic load ratings are based on 1 set.

192 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

Cross Roller Guide Way

Unit : mm

Dimensions Basic load ratings

Mass
Dyn. Stat. (1set) Part No.
g
9
13
18
22
26
30
35
0.84 28
1.46 43
1.74 57
2.01 71
2.52 85
2.76 98
3.00 112
3.23 126
3.68 140
3.90 153
4.32 166
98
148
195
242
289
336
384
431
478
525
572
619
647

Cross Roller Guide Way 193

D Cross Roller Guide Way

WRG Type
Examples of model number formation

Part No. Roller Size Length of Race rail

Accuracy : Normal(No symbol), High(H), Precision(P)
The number of Roller
* Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & applicaton

Dimensions
Max. No.of
Part No. Stroke Roller
Z

Note 1) 1Set = 4 Race rail + 2 Roller cages + 8 Stoppers.

Note 2) Basic load ratings are based on 1 set.

194 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

Cross Roller Guide Way

Unit : mm

Mass
(1set)
g

Cross Roller Guide Way 195

D Cross Roller Guide Way

WRGO Type
Examples of model number formation

Part No. Roller Size Length of Race rail

Accuracy : Normal(No symbol), High(H), Precision(P)
The number of Roller
* Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & applicaton

Dimensions
Max. No.of
Part No. Stroke Roller
Z

Note 1) 1Set = 4 Race rail + 2 Roller cages + 8 Stoppers.

Note 2) Basic load ratings are based on 1 set.

196 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

Cross Roller Guide Way

Unit : mm

Dimensions Basic load ratings Mass

Dyn. Stat. kg/m Part No.
(Rail/EA)

Cross Roller Guide Way 197

D Cross Roller Guide Way

WRG-AC Type
Examples of model number formation
Patent
Applied
Roller
Pinion
Part No. Roller Size Length of Race rail
Anti-Creep
Accuracy : Normal(No symbol), High(H), Precision(P)
The number of Roller Rack
* Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & applicaton

Dimensions
Max. No.of
Part No. Stroke Roller
Z

4
7
10
12
15
17
20
22
25
28
31

Note 1) 1Set = 4 Race rail + 2 Roller cages + 8 Stoppers.

2) Basic load ratings are based and mass on 1 set.
3) Needed stopper additional indication is required.

198 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

Cross Roller Guide Way

Unit : mm

Mass
(1set)
g
28
43
57
71
85
98
112
126
140
153
166
98
148
195
242
289
336
384
431
478
525
572
619
647
260
400
530
660
790
920
1050
1180
1300
1430
1530

Cross Roller Guide Way 199

D Cross Roller Guide Way

WRGW Type
Examples of model number formation

Part No. Roller Size Length of Race rail

Accuracy : Normal(No symbol), High(H), Precision(P)
The number of Roller
* Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & applicaton

Dimensions
Max. No.of
Part No. Stroke Roller
Z

Note 1) 1Set = 3 Race rail + 2 Roller cages + 8 Stoppers.

Note 2) Basic load ratings are based on 1 set.

200 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

Cross Roller Guide Way

Unit : mm
Dimensions Basic load ratings
Mass
(1set) Part No.
g
9
14
18
22
26
31
35
29
43
58
72
83
99
113
101
142
197
240
292
339
387
263
401
530
660
787
920

Cross Roller Guide Way 201

D Cross Roller Guide Way

WRGT Type
Examples of model number formation

Part No. Roller Size Length of Race rail

Hole Type onto the middle rail : Tab(No symbol), Hole(B)
* Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & applicaton

Main Dimensions Dimensions of the table-surface

Part No. Whidth Height Length Location of taps onto the table
Max.
Stroke B1

202 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

Cross Roller Guide Way

Unit : mm
Dimensions of the side Dimensions of the bed-surface Basic load ratings Accuracy
Dyn. Stat. Part No.

Cross Roller Guide Way 203

D Cross Roller Guide Way

WRGT-B Type
Examples of model number formation

Part No. Roller Size Length of Race rail

Hole Type onto the middle rail : Tab(No symbol), Hole(B)
* Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & applicaton

Main Dimensions Dimensions of the table-surface

Whidth Height Length Location of taps onto the table
Part No. Max.
Stroke B1

204 Cross Roller Guide Way

WON ST CO., LTD.

Cross Roller Guide Way

When WON Super Ball Bushing is installed into a housing for
adjustable clearance, it’s bearing plates in the radial direction
makes the radial clearance to be easily adjusted for precise
and strict running.
- Adjusting the Zero clearance
After Super Ball Bushing is installed into a housing for ad-
justable clearance, the radial clearance must be reduced by
means of an adjusting screw in the bushing housing until a
slight resistance is felt when the shaft is turned.
In application subject to vibration, the adjusting screw should
be suitably secured against working loose once the desired Fig 3. Radial Clearance Adjustment
clearance has been established.
- Pre-load
If pre-load is required, we recommend that zero clearance should be established as described above
using a dummy shaft whose diameter is smaller by the amount of the desired pre-load(µ)than the actual

Super Ball Bushing

guide shaft diameter(d) on which the linear bushing is to run.

6. Installation cost reduction

WON Super Ball Bushing provides the reduction both the in stallation time and cost by the Self Aligning
feature against errors to be caused by inaccurate machining, mounting errors or shaft deflection.

7. Smooth Running
Self-Aligning feature makes easy entry of the balls into the load carrying area. As the bushing and the
retainer are made of light and durability of abrasion polyamide, the inertia force and the noise are small.
Therefore the friction factor of unsealed WON Super Ball Bushing using oil as a lubrication up to 0.001.

8. Environmental Temperature
Use at the higher temperature than 100°C reduces the traveling life.
(See Temperature factor of the page A-4.)

Zero Clearance Pre-load

Fig 4. Zero Clearance & Pre-load

Super Ball Bushing 215

E Super Ball Bushing

2 Super Ball Bushing Type

1. Asian Standard

SB Bearing SBO Bearing SH Block SHW Block

SH-A Block SHO Block

216 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

2. European Standard

SBE Bearing SBEO Bearing CS Block CS-A Block

Super Ball Bushing

CSW Block CSW-A Block CSO Block CSO-A Block

CSOW Block CSOW-A Block

3. Inch Standard

SBA Bearing SBAO Bearing

Super Ball Bushing 217

E Super Ball Bushing

3 Life Span
As long as the linear system is reciprocated while being loaded, continuous stress acts on the linear
system to cause ‘flaking’ on the rolling bodies and raceway surface because of material fatigue.
The traveling distance of linear system until the first flaking occurs is called the life of the system.

1. Basic Dynamic Load Rating (C)

The term is arrived at based on an evaluation of a number of identical linear systems individually run in
the same conditions. If 90% of them can run with the load(with a constant value in a constant direction)
for a distance of 50x103 meters without damage caused by rolling fatigue. This is the basis of this rating.

2. Hardness factor (fH)

The shaft must be sufficiently hardened when a side
bushing is used. If not properly hardened, permiss-
ible load is lowered and the life of the bushing will be
shortened. If the temperature of the linear systems
Hardness factor (fH)

exceeds 100°C, the rating life will be shortened.

L : Running distance life (km)

Raceway Hardness HRC
C : Basic dynamic load rating (N)
T : Basic dynamic torque (N.m) Fig 5. Hardness factor (fH)
P : Applied load (N)
fH : Hardness factor(fig 5.)
fT : Temperature factor(fig 6.)
fD : Load direction factor(fig 8.)
Temperature factor (fT)

Lh : Service life (hr)

L : Running distance life (km) Linear motion system temperature °C
ℓS : Stroke Length (m)
n1 : Number of strokes per minute (o.p.m) Fig 6. Temperature factor (fT)

218 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

3. Temperature factor (fT)

If the temperature of the linear system exceeds 100° C, the
rating life span will be shortened. (fig 6.)

4. Load direction factor (fD)

The stated load capacities in dimension table are valid for
installation in ‘min’ position. (fig 7.) If the load is acting in any
other direction, these load capacities must be changed by
factor(C) and (C0) as (fig 8.)
Fig 7. Direction of load and load capacity

Closed type

Super Ball Bushing

SB16 SB20 SB25 SB30 SB40 SB50
SBE16 SBE20 SBE25 SBE30 SBE40 SBE50

Open type

SBO16 SBO20 SBO25 SBO30 SBO40 SBO50

SBEO16 SBEO20 SBEO25 SBEO30 SBEO40 SBEO50

Fig 8. Load director and factor

5. Basic Static Load Rating (C0)

This term defines a static load such that, at the contacting position where the maximum stress is exceeded,
the sum of the permanent defomation of the rolling plane is 0.0001 time of the diameter of the rolling
elements. If inertia force exceeds the Static Load Co by vibration, shock or high speed, the linear motion
would be rough as well as the life would be very reduced. Thus, these points should be paid attention to.

Super Ball Bushing 219

E Super Ball Bushing

6. Housing and Shaft tolerance

Housing is essential to use WON Super Ball Bushing and service life and accuracy is affected by the
inner tolerance of housing.
You can refer to table 2~7 about housing and shaft tolerance to use Super Ball Bushing.

Housing tolerance
Table 2. Asian type Unit : mm
Part No. SB 16 SB 20 SB 25 SB 30 SB 40
Inner Diameter(D) 28 32 40 45 60
+0.021 +0.025 +0.030
Tolerance(H7)
0 0 0
Table 3. European type Unit : mm
Part No. SBE 16 SBE 20 SBE 25 SBE 30 SBE 40 SBE 50
Inner Diameter(D) 26 32 40 47 62 75
+0.021 +0.025 +0.030
Tolerance(H7)
0 0 0
Table 4. INCH type Unit : inch
Part No. SBA 4 SBA 6 SBA 8 SBA 10 SBA 12 SBA 16 SBA 20 SBA24
Inner Diameter(D) 0.5 0.625 0.875 1.125 1.25 1.5625 2 2.375
+0.0007 +0.0008 +0.0010 +0.0012
Tolerance(H7)
0 0 0 0

Shaft tolerance
Table 5. Asian type Unit : mm
Part No. SB 16 SB 20 SB 25 SB 30 SB 40
Shaft Diameter 16 20 25 45 60
0 0 0
Tolerance(h6)
-0.011 -0.013 -0.016
Table 6. European type Unit : mm
Part No. SBE 16 SBE 20 SBE 25 SBE 30 SBE 40 SBE 50
Shaft Diameter 16 20 25 30 40 50
0 0 0
Tolerance(h6)
-0.011 -0.013 -0.016
Table 7. INCH type Unit : inch
Part No. SBA 4 SBA 6 SBA 8 SBA 10 SBA 12 SBA 16 SBA 20 SBA 24
Shaft Diameter 0.25 0.375 0.5 0.625 0.75 1 1.25 1.5
-0.0002 -0.0002 -0.0003 -0.0004
Tolerance(h6)
-0.0006 -0.0007 -0.0008 -0.0010

220 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

4 Assembly
WON Super Ball Bushing is very precise so it must be handled with meticulous care. Use of a jig(see
illustration) is recommended for insertion into a housing and Care should be taken not to exert pressure
on the ball reatainer or seals.
The edge of the housing bore must be charmfered as well as the ends of the shaft are also chamfered.
And the WON Super Ball Bushing is not tilted when it is pushed onto the shaft.

Reducing load capacity in short-stroke application

In short stroke application the service life of the WON shafts is shorter than that of the Super Ball Bush-
ing. For this reason the life can be shorten up to about 70% by the stroke.

Super Ball Bushing

Fig 9.

Super Ball Bushing 221

E Super Ball Bushing

SB type
Asian Super Ball Bushing

Closed type

222 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

SBO type
Asian Super Ball Bushing

Open type

Super Ball Bushing

Super Ball Bushing 223

E Super Ball Bushing

SH type
Asian Super Ball Bushing Block

Closed type(with 1pc of SB)

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Shaft Basic Load Ratings
Part No. dyn. stat.
D h E W L F G T B C K S1 S2 d C Co weight
(N) (N) (g)

1240 800 148

2280 1400 198

3980 2465 472

4420 2800 589

8980 5460 1225

12965 7940 2420

224 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

SHW type
Asian Super Ball Bushing Block

Double Closed type(with 2pcs of SB)

Super Ball Bushing

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Shaft Basic Load Ratings
Part No. dyn. stat.
weight
D h E W L F G T B C K S1 S2 d C Co
(g)
(N) (N)

1965 1600 308

3615 2800 422

6315 4930 972

7015 5600 1180

14255 10920 2461

Super Ball Bushing 225

E Super Ball Bushing

SH-A type
Asian Super Ball Bushing Block

Closed adjustable clearance type(with 1pc of SB)

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Shaft Basic Load Ratings
Part No. dyn. stat.
weight
D h E W L F G T B C K S1 S2 d C Co
(g)
(N) (N)

28 1240 800 160

32 2280 1400 218

40 3980 2465 490

45 4420 2800 610

60 8980 5460 1200

80 12965 7940 -

226 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

SHO type
Asian Super Ball Bushing Block

Open type(with 1pc of SBO)

Super Ball Bushing

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Shaft Basic Load Ratings
Part No. dyn. stat. weight
D h E W L F T h1 θ B C K S d C Co (g)
(N) (N)

SHO 16UU 28 20 22.5 45 45 33 9 11 60° 32 30 6.5 M5 12 16 1410 960 124

SHO 20UU 32 23 24 48 50 39 11 11 60° 35 35 6.5 M6 12 20 2300 1430 178

SHO 25UU 40 27 30 60 65 47 14 12.5 60° 40 40 10 M6 12 25 4030 2540 352

SHO 30UU 45 33 35 70 70 56 15 15 60° 50 50 10 M8 18 30 4475 2890 507

SHO 40UU 60 42 45 90 90 72 20 20 60° 65 65 12.5 M10 20 40 9100 5625 1055

Super Ball Bushing 227

E Super Ball Bushing

SBE type
European Super Ball Bushing

Closed type

120

184

342

586

228 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

SBEO type
European Super Ball Bushing

Open type

20 Super Ball Bushing

100

154

286

486

Super Ball Bushing 229

E Super Ball Bushing

CS type
European Super Ball Bushing Block

Closed type(with 1pc of SBE)

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Shaft No. Basic Load Ratings

Part No. Ball dyn. stat. weight

D h E W L F G T B C K b S1 S2 d rows C Co (g)
(N) (N)

26 1140 710 204

32 2280 1400 340

40 4280 2740 636

47 5020 3365 970

62 8980 5460 1740

75 12965 7940 2922

230 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

CS-A type
European Super Ball Bushing Block

Closed adjustable clearance type(with 1pc of SBE)

Super Ball Bushing

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Shaft No. Basic Load Ratings

Part No. Ball dyn. stat. weight

D h E W L F G T B C K b S1 S2 d rows C Co (g)
(N) (N)

26 1140 710 192

32 2280 1400 322

40 4280 2740 632

47 5020 3365 965

62 8980 5460 1736

75 12965 7940 2910

Super Ball Bushing 231

E Super Ball Bushing

CSW type
European Super Ball Bushing Block

Double closed type(with 2pcs of SBE)

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Shaft No. Basic Load Ratings

Part No. Ball dyn. stat. weight

D h E W L F G T B C K b S1 S2 d rows C Co (g)
(N) (N)

232 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

CSW-A type
European Super Ball Bushing Block

Double closed adjustable clearance type(with 2pcs of SBE)

1911 1215 364 Super Ball Bushing

3812 2508 614

7310 4390 1212

9055 5919 1252

15092 8624 3310

22246 13524 5856

Super Ball Bushing 233

E Super Ball Bushing

CSO type
European Super Ball Bushing Block

Open type(with 1pc of SBEO)

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Shaft No. Basic Load Ratings
Part No. Ball dyn. stat. weight
D h E W L F T h1 θ B C K b S1 S2 D rows C Co (g)
(N) (N)
CSO 16UU -
26 22 26.5 53 43 35 8 9 68°40 26 6.5 13 M6 16 4 1330 910 160
CSO 16UU-B M5
CSO 20UU -
32 25 30 60 54 42 10 9 55°45 32 7.5 18 M8 20 5 2310 1445 280
CSO 20UU-B M6
CSO 25UU -
40 30 39 78 67 51 13 11.5 57°60 40 9 22 M10 25 5 4330 2820 552
CSO 25UU-B M8
CSO 30UU -
47 35 43.5 87 79 60 15 14 57°68 45 9.5 22 M10 30 5 5080 3460 846
CSO 30UU-B M8
CSO 40UU -
62 45 54 108 91 77 20 19.5 56°86 58 11 26 M12 40 5 9095 5625 1516
CSO 40UU-B M10
CSO 50UU -
75 50 66 132 113 88 25 22.5 54°108 50 12 34 M16 50 5 13130 8175 2546
CSO 50UU-B M12
1N ≒ 0.102kgf

234 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

CSO-A type
European Super Ball Bushing Block

Open adjustable clearance type(with 1pc of SBEO)

Super Ball Bushing

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Shaft No. Basic Load Ratings
Part No. Ball dyn. stat. weight
D h E W L F T h1 θ B C K b S1 S2 D rows C Co (g)
(N) (N)

26 6.5 1330 910 158

32 7.5 2310 1445 277

40 9 4330 2820 548

47 9.5 5080 3460 840

62 11 9095 5625 1510

75 12 13130 8175 2535

Super Ball Bushing 235

E Super Ball Bushing

CSOW type
European Super Ball Bushing Block

Double open type(with 2pcs of SBEO)

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Shaft No. Basic Load Ratings
Part No. Ball dyn. stat. weight
D h E W L F T h1 θ B C K b S1 S2 d rows C Co (g)
(N) (N)

26 6.5 2110 1820 338

32 7.5 5745 5600 552

40 9 10785 10960 1092

47 9.5 12650 13460 1656

62 11 22625 21840 3062

75 12 32670 31760 5042

236 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

CSOW-A type
European Super Ball Bushing Block

Double Open adjustable clearance type(with 2pcs of SBEO)

Super Ball Bushing

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions No. Basic Load Ratings
Part No. Shaft Ball dyn. stat. weight
D h E W L F T h1 θ B C K b S 1 S2 d rows C Co (g)
(N) (N)

26 6.5 2110 1820 330

32 7.5 5745 5600 540

40 9 10785 10960 1080

47 9.5 12650 13460 1645

62 11 22625 21840 3045

75 12 32670 31760 5030

Super Ball Bushing 237

E Super Ball Bushing

SBA type SBAO type

Inch Super Ball Bushing Inch Super Ball Bushing

No. Weight No. Weight Shaft d Dimensions

Part No. Ball Part No. Ball d D B
rows (N) rows (N) (inch) tolerance(inch) (inch) (inch) tolerance(inch)
0 0
SBA4 4 0.04 - - - 0.25 0.5 0.75
-0.0005 -0.015
0 0
SBA6 4 0.06 - - - 0.375 0.625 0.875
-0.0005 -0.015
0 0
SBA8 4 0.19 SBAO8 3 0.15 0.5 0.875 1.25
-0.0005 -0.02
0 0
SBA10 5 0.46 SBAO10 4 0.37 0.625 1.125 1.5
-0.0005 -0.02
0 0
SBA12 6 0.55 SBAO12 5 0.45 0.75 1.25 1.625
-0.0005 -0.02
0 0
SBA16 6 1.18 SBAO16 5 0.98 1 1.5625 2.25
-0.0005 -0.02
0 0
SBA20 6 2.16 SBAO20 5 1.86 1.25 2 2.625
-0.0005 -0.025
0 0
SBA24 6 3.34 SBAO24 5 2.84 1.5 2.375 3
-0.0005 -0.03
Note(1) the upper value in basic load ratings is for SBA series, the lower value is for SBAO series.

238 Super Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Super Ball Bushing

Seal Grease inlet Ball Basic Load Rating(1)
B1 tolerance B2 D1 h F G J diameter dyn. stat.
(inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) C(N) Co(N)
0
0.515 0.039 0.4687 - - - - 1/4 255 150
-0.015
0
0.703 0.039 0.588 - - - - 1/16 390 260
-0.015
0 895 570
1.032 0.0459 0.8209 0.313 0.136 0.625 Thru Hole 3/32
-0.02 1050 710
0 1480 830
1.112 0.0559 1.059 0.375 0.105 0.125 0.039 1/8
-0.02 2080 1370
0 2255 1395
1.272 0.0559 1.176 0.438 0.136 0.125 0.059 1/8
-0.02 2470 1600
0 3990 2465
1.886 0.0679 1.4687 0.563 0.136 0.125 0.047 5/32
-0.02 4630 3070
0 5470 3175
2.011 0.0679 1.8859 0.625 0.201 0.1875 0.09 3/16
-0.025 6430 4040
0 7640 4345
2.422 0.0859 2.2389 0.75 0.201 0.1875 0.09 7/32
-0.03 8990 5530

Super Ball Bushing 239

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Ball Bushing

Contents

1 Linear Ball Bushing •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 242 7 Mounting of LM case unit

1. Mounting of SH type•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 254
2 Types and Characteristics •• • • • • • • • • • • • • 243

3 Part Number 8 Cautions in use

Linear Ball Bushing

4. Calculation of expected Travel Life• • • 247 4. Avoid the Rotational Motion• • • • • • • • • • • 255
5. M
ounting of open type Linear Ball Bushing
with three ball rows•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 255
4 Equivalent factor •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 247

5 Lubrication & Friction

Linear Ball Bushing

F Linear Ball Bushing

1 Linear Ball Bushing

WON Linear Ball Bushing, LM type, is the linear motion system with unlimited stroke by being applied
with LM shaft. Because of the point contact between Balls and LM shaft, the minimum friction can be
acquired and can provide you the high-precision motion.

1. Components and Features

As shown in Fig 1. WON Linear Ball Bushing provides the alignment of the balls toward the LM shaft
by the single retainer and cylindrical shape of raceway. Outer sleeve is made of high-carbon chromium
bearing steel, and does heat treatment and then inner and outer grinding process are applied.

2. Interchangeability
The dimensions of WON Linear Ball Bushing are standardized to have full interchangeability. LM shaft
is provided with the cylindrical grinding to have high precision fitting clearance.

3. Rigidity Outer Sleeve

Hardened and precisely ground outer sleeve is made of bearing steel, and can be directly assembled
with the needle bearing on outer surface.

4. High precision Retainer

The single body retainer guides 4~6 ball circuits, and it gives the precision guiding against the balls
moving direction and smooth motion.

5. Application
WON Linear Ball Bushing is widely used in precision equipments; computer and peripheral equipments,
measuring equipments, auto recording equipments, 3D measuring equipments, and linear motion system
in machine for mass production; multi-axis drilling machines, punching process, tool grinders, auto-gas
cutters, printing machines, card selectors, food packing machines, etc.

Hardened and
Non-load ground outer sleeve
Load Carring row
carrying row

LM Shaft

Retainer Rataining End seal

Ball
ring

Fig 1. Linear Ball Bushing

242 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

2 Types and Characteristics

Classification Type Shape and Feature

Standard
- Cylindrical shape with precision
LM dimension for smoother linear
LME movement.

Open - One ball circuit is removed from

Type standard type which provides
the maximum rigidity and stiff-
LM□OP ness when combined with Sup-

Linear Ball Bushing

LME□OP port Rail Unit.

Linear
Ball
Bushing
Adjustable
Clearance -
Outer sleeve is slotted in the
Type axial direction to be adjustable
the clearance between sharft
LM□AJ and Linear Ball Bushing.
LME□AJ

Long -
Two retainers are installed in
Type Long type (Double-wide type)
of outer cylinder for severe mo-
LM□L
LME□L ment loads.

Linear Ball Bushing 243

F Linear Ball Bushing

Classification Type Shape and Feature

Round - Round Flange Type with mount-

Type ing holes.
- Easier and more compact in-
LMF stallation

- Square Flange Type with

Square mounting holes.
Type
- More compact design is avail-
LMK able due to the lower center
height.
Flange Type
Linear
Ball
Bushing
Two Side
Cut
Flange - Two Side Cut Flange Type with
Type mounting holes.

LMH

Flanged
Long -
Two retainers are installed in
Type Long type (Double-wide type)
of outer cylinder for severe mo-
LMF□L ment loads.
LMK□L

244 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

3 Part Number

WON Linear Ball Bushing Type

- : Closed type
OP : Open type
Model AJ : Adjustable type
- : Standard Series
E : European Series
Seal
- : No Seal
U : Seal on one side
UU : Seals on both sides
Flange Option Type
- : No Flange - : Standard
F : Round Type L : Long(Double-wide)
K : Square Type
H : Two Side Cut Type Outer Diameter of Shaft

Linear Ball Bushing

1. Standard Tolerance
The tolerance of inner constant diameter, outside diameter, and length on Linear Ball Bushing is listed in
the dimensional table. Clearance type (..AJ) and open The tolerance of internal diameter and external
diameter of (...OP) indicates the value before opening.

2. Load Rating & Travel Life

The load rating of WON Linear Ball Bushing can be affected by the ball position against the load. The
basic load rating on the table is that of Linear Ball Bushing when ball circuit is just beneath the load. As
shown in Fig 2. If the balls are located in symmetrical position against the load, the load rating will be
increased and the travel life will be extended.

L : Travel life (km)

L100 : Travel life (km)
(N)
C : Basic dynamic load rating (N)
C100 : Basic dynamic load rating (N)
P : Applied load
fH : Hardness factor
fW : Load coefficient
fC : Contact factor
fT : Temperature factor

Linear Ball Bushing 245

F Linear Ball Bushing

Fig 2. Load ratings and Ball position

No. of Ball position No. of Ball position No. of Ball position
Ball Ball Ball
Rows Max. Load rating Min. Load rating Rows Max. Load rating Min. Load rating Rows Max. Load rating Min. Load rating

4 5 6

F=1.41×C F=C F=1.46×C F=C F=1.26×C F=C

C : refer to dimensions table
• If a Linear Ball Bushing or two Linear Ball Bushings are applied by the the moment load, the calculation
of the equivalent radial load is required.
PU : Eqivalent radial load (N)
(when the moment is applied)
K : Equivalent factor (Refer to table 1~3)
M : Applied moment (Nㆍmm)
PU should be up to basic load rating

• If the moment load and the radial load are applied, the travel life can be calculated by the sum of the
moment load and the radial load. From the above equations, the stroke and number of strokes per
minute are constant, the travel life can be calculated by the following equation.
Lh : Travel life (hr)
ℓs : Stroke (m)
L : Rated life (Km)
n1 : Number of strokes per minute(o.p.m)

• When short stroke is applied, travel life is calculated by basic dynamic load rating multiplied factor Kc
on Fig 3.

3. Calculation Example
The Maximum applied load and the travel life are the most important tactors for choosing a proper size
of Linear Ball Bushing. Belows are the sample calculations of the expecting travel life and choosing a
proper Linear Ball Bushing.
-Working conditions-
Operating speed
Applied load : 250 N (P)
Stroke : 0.0250 m (ℓs)
Number of strokes per minute : 60 (n 1)
Shaft hardness : HRC 60 (fH=1.0)

246 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

4. Calculation of expected Travel Life

Assuming the basic dynamic load rating is based on travel life of 50km and all other factor is 1.0, you
choose the Linear Ball Bushing size that you can expect the travel life. Let’s try LM40UU with the above
working conditions.

Let’s assume our design travel life is 15,000hours ;

L = 15,000 x 2 x 0.250 x 10-3 x 60 x 60 = 27,000km

So, the proper Linear Ball Bushing for above condition is LM50UU which has 3,822N(390kgf) as the
basic load rating.

Linear Ball Bushing

4 Equivalent factor
Table 1. Equivalent factor for LM type Table 2. Equivalent factor for LM-L type
Equivalent
Equivalent
factor : Kfactor : K Equivalent
Equivalent
factor : Kfactor : K
Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No.
Single Single Double Double Single Single

Note) the Equival factors for LME F/K/H-L types are same
Note) the Equival factors for LME F/K/H and SH types are as LM-L type.
same as LM type.

Linear Ball Bushing 247

F Linear Ball Bushing

Table 3. Equivalent factor for LME type

Equivalent factor : K
Part No.
Single Double

Note) the Equival factors for LME F/K/H and SH types are
same as LM type.

Short stroke Application

In applications, when the stroke is short, the life of the shaft is shorter than that of the Linear Ball Bush-
ing. In a short stroke applications, the required dynamic load rating must be multiplied by the factor Kc
as found on Fig 3. below.
Short stroke correction factor (Kc)

Stroke
Linear Ball Bushing Length

Fig 3. Short stroke correction factor (Kc)

248 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

5 Lubrication & Friction

Usually, Linear Ball Bushing is used with grease lubrication or oil lubrication, but in some case, it is used
without any lubrication.

1. Grease Lubrication
Before applying the grease, the anticorrosive oil must be removed by kerosene or organic solvent, and
apply the grease after drying. Must apply grease directly on the ball for a both side sealed type (..UU).
And apply same as above or on the shaft directly for a without sealed type. Lithium soap radical of vis-
cosity mark No. 2 is recommended for use.

2. Oil Lubrication
There is no need to remove anticorrosive oil when oil is used for lubrication. ISO viscosity grade VG15
~ 100 oil is usually according to the operating temperature.

Operating Temp. Viscosity

-30°C ~ 50°C VG 15 ~ 46

Linear Ball Bushing

50°C ~ 80°C VG 46 ~ 100

The turbine oil, machine oil, and spindle oil are usually used as lubrication oil. Drop the oil on the shaft
for lubrication, or supply it through the oil hole provided on the housing. (Fig 4.) Contact WON for Linear
Ball Bushing with lubrication hole for users demands.

Fig 4.

Because the seals may remove the oil on shaft, oil dropping lubrication is not recommended for both
sides seal type.

Linear Ball Bushing 249

F Linear Ball Bushing

3. Coefficient of Friction
The balls in a Linear Bushing are the rolling elements, so the balls can reduce the frictional resistance.
Static friction is particularly very low, and there is just little difference between static and dynamic friction,
so, the stick-slip does not occur. Such low friction make submicron feeding possible. The normal friction
coefficient is in Fig 5. and the friction resistance can be calculated by the following equation.

F : Friction resistance factor (N)

fs : Resistant of Seal (1.3 ~ 204 N)
P : Applied load (N)
(Perpendicular load against shaft core)
µ : Friction coefficient (Static or dynamic)

① Oil Lubrication
② Grease Lubrication
③ Oil Free(No Lubrications)

row
row
row

P P : Applied load
Load Ratio :
C C : Basic dynamic load rating

Fig 5. Coefficient of Friction

250 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

6 Assembly
1. Tolerance of Housing Bore
Recommended tolerances of Housing bore for WON Linear Ball Bushing are in Table 4. Normal fit is
standard, but for without clearance, press fit is also available
Table 4. Tolerance for House Bore
Type Case
Part No. Grade Normal Fit Tight Fit
High(H)

Linear Ball Bushing

2. Clearance of Outer Sleeve and Shaft
Normal fit is standard for using of Linear Bushing with LM shaft, and for without clearance, Tight fit is
also available.

Table 5. Tolerance for Shaft Diameter

Type LM Shaft
Part No. Grade Normal Fit Tight Fit
High(H)

Note 1) When clearance after installation is required to minus, Allowable value of radial clearance is not
allowed to exceed the value in the table.
Note 2) Axial clearance of SH, SHW, SHO type are same as High grade.

Linear Ball Bushing 251

F Linear Ball Bushing

3. Mounting
High holding strength toward LM shaft direction is not required, but mounting with press fit only for
mounting is not recommended. Please see the table 4. for tolerance of Housing Bore.

4. Standard type
Possible mounting methods are illustrated in Fig 6. and Fig 7. Mount a Linear Ball Bushing with retaining
rings and cover plates.

Fig 6. Mounting with retaining rings Fig 7. Mounting with cover plates

5. Retaining ring for Mounting

Retaining rings for mounting LM type WON Linear Ball Bushing are used as shown in the below table.

Retaining ring
Part No. External(for shaft) Internal(for Bore)
C type Needle type C type Needle type
LM 5 10 10 10 10
LM 6 12 12 12 12
LM 8 - 15 15 15
LM 8S - 15 15 15
6. Setscrew Mounting Prohibited
LM 10 19 19 19 19 Mounting a Linear Ball Bushing with a setscrew
LM 12 21 21 21 21 as shown in Fig 8. will cause a deformation of
LM 13 23 22 23 - the outer sleeve so that it should be avoided.
LM 16 28 - 28 28
LM 20 32 - 32 32 Housing Setscrew
LM 25 40 40 40 40
LM 30 45 45 45 45
LM 35 52 52 52 52
LM 40 - 60 60 60
LM 50 - 80 80 80
LM 60 - 90 90 90

table 6. The information of above table is com- Fig 8. Mounting with Setscrew
monly applied to both LM and LM-L type.

252 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

7. Flanged type
It is available for flanged types to be mounted itself only with mounting bolt due to its single body shape.
note) Geometric dimensional tolerance should be considered when outer sleeve is the datum for installation.
- Mounting from outer sleeve as datum

- Mounting of Flange with mounting bolt - Mounting of Protrude Type

- Mounting of Middle Flanged type

Linear Ball Bushing

Fig 9. Mounting of Flanged type

8. Mounting of Adjustable type

Adjustment of clearance for adjustable type(...AJ) and LM shaft can be obtained by assembling with the
adjustable type Housing. In the case, the slotted side of Linear Bushing should be located at 90° of open
side of housing for uniform deformation in the radial direction. Please see Fig 10.

9. Mounting of Open type

Open type (...OP) also can be used with clearance adjustable housing as shown on Fig 11. Light pre-
load is applied for normal using, but heavy pre-load should be avoid.

Fig 10. Mounting of Adjustable type Fig 11. Mounting of Open type

Linear Ball Bushing 253

F Linear Ball Bushing

10. Mounting of Shaft support

Shaft support, WK can be mounted with mounting bolt for a table, and LM shaft can be mounted with
tightening bolt.

tightening bolt

mounting bolt

datum plane

Fig 12. Mounting of Shaft support

7 Mounting of LM case unit

1. Mounting of SH type
Mounting of SH, SHW, SHO type from both the top and bottom side with mounting bolt are available and
it gives minimum mounting time.

Fig 13. Mounting of Case Unit

8 Cautions in use
1. Mounting of Linear Ball Bushing
For mounting of standard type WON Linear Ball Bushing into the Housing, a jig should be used to avoid
direct hitting on the outer sleeve or seal during mounting, See Fig 14.

254 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

2. Insertion of Shaft
Care must be taken to align when inserting a shaft into a Linear Ball Bushing. If the shaft is inserted
slantly, balls may be departed from the damaged or deformed retainer. See Fig 15.

D : outer diameter of outer housing

dr : inner diameter of inner housing

Fig 14. Mounting into housing Fig 15. Insertion of Shaft

3. When Moment loads applied

External loads should be distributed uniformly on a Linear Ball Bushing. When moment loads are ap-
plied, two or more Linear Bushings should be used on one LM shaft, and the distance between two
Linear Ball Bushings should have enough distance.
Calculate the equivalent load when the moment loads are applied and choose the proper Linear Ball Bush-
ing. Please refer to the sample calculation for more information.

Linear Ball Bushing

4. Avoid the Rotational Motion
WON Linear Ball Bushing is not suitable for rotational motion. See Fig 16. If the Linear Bushing is ex-
posed to rotational motion, it may lead unexpected accidents.

5. Mounting of open type Linear Ball Bushing with three ball rows
Please mount the open type Linear Ball Bushings with three ball circuit as same as Fig 17. for consid-
ering of load distribution.

load rating

Fig 16. Fig 17.

Linear Ball Bushing 255

F Linear Ball Bushing

LM Series

Note) Plating and Raydent treatment are available

256 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Unit : mm
Dimensions (mm) Allowable
D L B Wgt. Diametral
Tol. Tol. Tol. W D1 h h1 (gf) Clearance Part No.

Linear Ball Bushing

Based on Standard type

Linear Ball Bushing 257

F Linear Ball Bushing

LME Series

Note) Plating and Raydent treatment are available

Reference of dynamic load rating Dynamic

load rating
Dynamic load rating is based on the nominal life of 50km.
In case of 100km, C on the table needs to be divided by 1.26

ex)

Nominal life(km)

258 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Ball Bushing

Note) Plating and Raydent treatment are available

* The value of Circular type

Linear Ball Bushing 259

F Linear Ball Bushing

LMF/K/H Series
Flange Type

Unit : mm

Note) Plating and Raydent treatment are available

* The value of Circular type

260 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Ball Bushing

Linear Ball Bushing 261

F Linear Ball Bushing

LMF/K□L Series
Flange Type

Unit : mm

Allowable Basic Load Ratings Working Bore

Part No. No. of Wgt.* Diametral Diameter
Ball Clearance
Circular Square (gf) Dyn. Stat. dr Tol.
circuit
type type C (N) Co (N)

Note) Plating and Raydent treatment are available

* The value of Circular type

262 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

Linear Ball Bushing

Linear Ball Bushing 263

F Linear Ball Bushing

LM□︎L / LME□L Series

Unit : mm
Series Working Bore Dimensions (mm) Basic Load Ratings
Diameter D L B Wgt.* Dyn. Stat.
No. of
Part No. Ball Tol. Tol. Tol. Tol. C Co
circuit

Series
46 40 421 804
61 80 813 1570
68 115 921 1780
80 180 1370 2740
112 430 1570 3140
123 615 2500 5490
151 1400 3430 8040
192 2320 6080 15900
209 3900 7550 20000
Note) Plating and Raydent treatment are available

264 Linear Ball Bushing

WON ST CO., LTD.

SC Type

Unit : mm
Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Basic Load Ratings
No.
weight Shaft
ball dyn stat.

Linear Ball Bushing

Part No.
(g) d
h E W L F G T B C K S1 S2 rows C C0
(N) (N)
SC 8UU 52 11 17 34 30 22 18 6 24 18 5 M4 3.4 8 4 260 400
SC 10UU 92 13 20 40 35 26 22 8 28 21 6 M5 4.3 10 4 370 540
SC 12UU 102 15 21 42 36 29 25 8 30.5 26 5.75 M5 4.3 12 4 410 490
SC 13UU 123 15 22 44 39 30 26 8 33 26 5.5 M5 4.3 13 4 500 770
SC 16UU 189 19 25 50 44 38.5 35 9 36 34 7 M5 4.3 16 5 770 1170
SC 20UU 237 21 27 54 50 41 36 11 40 40 7 5.2 20 5 860 1370
SC 25UU 555 26 38 76 67 51.5 41 12 54 50 11 M8 7 25 6 980 1560
SC 30UU 685 30 39 78 72 59.5 49 15 58 58 10 M8 7 30 6 1560 2740
SC 35UU 1100 34 45 90 80 68 54 18 70 60 10 M8 7 35 6 1660 3130
SC 40UU 1600 40 51 102 90 78 62 20 80 60 11 M10 8.7 40 6 2150 4010
SC 50UU 3350 52 61 122 110 102 80 24 100 80 11 M10 8.7 50 6 3820 7930
1N ≒0.102kgf
Note. 1) LM □□UU is in the block.
2) marked as SH □□UU in the side of block

Linear Ball Bushing 265

F Linear Ball Bushing

Machined shaft as per customer

WSS drawing

Special
Standard shaft with taps
Machined WBS
KS STS440C(JIS SUS440C)
Shaft

Stainless steel shaft with taps

WBAS KS STB-2(JIS SUJ-2)

WBCS Hard Chrome plating shaft

with taps

268 Linear Motion Shaft

WON ST CO., LTD.

LM(Linear Motion) Shaft that WON “WON ST CO., LTD.” has been manufacturing is hardened and ground
shaft featuring high precision for rectilinear motion which can be used in conjunction with Ball Bushing.
LM Shaft used in conjunction with Ball Bushing has a role as the guide of the ball bushing and the inner
raceway of the bearing as well. The quality of shaft has a great influence on the functions of ball bushing
and linear motion system.

2. Materials
- LM Shaft High Carbon Steel (WON ST Standard Materials)
- High Carbon Chromium Bearing Steel (KS STB-2, JIS SUJ-2)
- Martensite Satinless Steel (KS STS440C, JIS SUS440C)
In general, “High Carbon Chromium Bearing Steel” is used. For corrosion resistance or non- lubricant
application, SUS440C is usually used; Chemistry, Food machinery, Medical instruments,Semiconductor, etc.
- Others(Not for Ball Bushing)
- KS SMS45C(JIS S45C)
- KS STS303(JIS SUS303)
- KS STS304(JIS SUS304)
- KS STS316(JIS SUS316)

2 Heat Treatment
WON ST CO., LTD. applies the stable and reliable heat treatment technology to LM Shaft using high fre-
quency induction by our own exclusive equipment for the heat treatment. The heat treatment by tempering
assures the LM Shafts have uniform hardness in both radial and axial directions, developing an appropri-

Linear Motion Shaft

ate hardened layer.

1. Surface Hardness
KS STB-2(JIS SUJ-2).........................HRC50 more~
KS STS440C(JIS SUS440C)............. ø16mm more HRC56 ~
............. ø13mm less HRC54 ~

Hardness distribution curve ▶︎

(ø20)

Spheroidizing Organizatron The cross-section of high

frequency induction heat
treatment
Fig 1. Organization photographs Fig 2. Photograph of Effective hardened layer

Linear Motion Shaft 269

G Linear Motion Shaft

3 Precision Class

Diameter tolerance Surface finish Straightness

g6, h6, h5(mainly) Rmax less 1.5μm 20μm / 300 mm less

4 Equation of Deflection-Angle of LM Shaft

Support- Deflection angle
ing Specified Conditions Deflection equation
method equation

Both
ends
fixing

One
ends
fixing

Deflection at loaded point (mm) Maximum deflection(mm)

Deflection angle at supporting point Modulus of elasticity 2.06x105N/mm2
Geometrical moment of inertia(mm4) Deflection angle at loading point
Loading point distance Span(mm)
Concentrated load(N) 1/48EI(1/N∙mm2)

270 Linear Motion Shaft

WON ST CO., LTD.

1. Case hardened & ground shaft

if) When both ends are fixed;
Geometrical moment of inertia Assign the values to equation
Diameter P=784(N), =430(mm),
C = 5.17 x 10 -12(1/N∙mm2)
in table
The geometrical moment of inertia and the value of
C(=1/48EI) of eash shaft as below.
DIA. Geometrical moment
meter of inertia
2. Hollow shaft

Outer Dia. Inner Dia.

Outer Inner Geometrical moment

DIA. DIA. of inertia

Linear Motion Shaft

● Example calculation ● Example calculation

Obtain the maximum deflection of a shaft with a The maximum deflection of a 1800mm length
major diameter 25mm and a span of 430mm when hollow shaft with outside diameter of 50mm
a concentrated load of 80kgf is applied to the center and inside diameter of 25mm is...
of the shaft.(Ignore the weight of the shaft) (Next page)

Linear Motion Shaft 271

G Linear Motion Shaft

if) When both ends are fixed;

According to condition P = 100N
=1800(mm)
C = 3.44 x 10-13 (1/N . mm2)
from the table, Therefore

5 Part Number of LM Shaft

1. Type number format I (Case hardened & ground shaft)

① Type of LM Shaft

Conventional shaft to be used with Ball Bushing.

- Material : High Carbon Steel (KS SM55C, JIS S55C) for LM Shaft,
KS STB-2(JIS SUJ-2)

The exclusive usage for Ball Bushing in use for high anti-corrosive applica-
Case tions under the oxidizing atmosphere such as water, vapor, chemical, food
Hardened process machinery, semiconductor and medical equipments.
and - Material : KS STS440C(JIS SUS440C)
Ground
Shaft
Hard Chromium plated shaft providing a cost reduction in comparison to the
stainless steel shaft with the same function as anti-corrosion.
- Material : High Carbon Steel KS SM55C(JIS S55C) for LM Shaft,
KS STB-2(JIS SUJ-2)

②M
achining type and number (In case of standard shaft or simple cutting shaft, This is not necessary
to be indicated)

D Manufacture refer to drawing

272 Linear Motion Shaft

WON ST CO., LTD.

③Diameter (㎜), ④Diameter Tolerance (㎛), ⑤Length(㎜)

DIA Diameter tolerance Standard stroked length

Linear Motion Shaft

Note 1) Max. Length : 6000mm
2) Max. Diameter : Ø300mm

Linear Motion Shaft 273

G Linear Motion Shaft

2. Type number format II (Hollow shaft)

① Type of LM Shaft

Conventional hollow shaft greatly contributes to reduce weight and simplify

equipment due to it’s hollow structure. Also suitable for electric wiring for
measurement, compression air, lubricant hydraulic piping, or robot arm.
- Material : High Carbon Steel for LM Shaft, KS STB-2(JIS SUJ-2)

Hollow
Hard chromium plated hollow shaft used with ball bushing for anti-corrosive
Shaft
applications.
- Material : High Carbon Steel for LM Shaft, KS STB-2(JIS SUJ-2)

Stainless steel hollow shaft having the strength of both WTS and WAS.
- Material : KS STS440C(JIS SUS440C)

② Machining type and number (In case of standard shaft or simple cutting shaft, This is not necessary
to be indicated))

D Manufacture refer to drawing

③ Outer diameter (㎜), ④ Diameter Tolerance (㎛), ⑤ Inner diameter (㎜), ⑥ Length (㎜)

Outer Dia. Inner Dia. Diameter tolerance Standard stocked length

10 4 -5 ~ -14 0 ~ -6 0 ~ -9
12 6
-6 ~ -17 0~8 0 ~ -11
16 8
20 14
25 16 -7 ~ -20 0 ~ -9 0 ~ -13
30 17
35 19
40 20 -9 ~ -25 0 ~ -11 0 ~ -16
50 25
Note) Manufacturing shafts as per Customer’s drawing.

274 Linear Motion Shaft

WON ST CO., LTD.

3. Type number format III (Tapped shaft)

① Type of LM Shaft

Standard tapped shaft.

Material : High Carbon Steel (KS SM55C, JIS
S55C) for LM Shaft, KS STB-2(JIS SUJ-2) We recommend that these shafts
should be applied with support
Stainless steel tapped shaft for strong anti-corrosion.

Linear Motion Shaft

Tapped rails for shafts and mainly applied
Shaft Material : KS STS440C(JIS SUS440C)
in the environment for being
occurred deflection or vibration
Hard chromium plated tapping shaft for anti-corro-
feasibly.
sion with economical cost in normal use.
Material : High Carbon Steel KS SM55C(JIS S55C)
for LM Shaft, KS STB-2(JIS SUJ-2)

② Diameter (㎜), ③ Diameter Tolerance (㎛), ④ Length (㎜), ⑤ Tap size (㎜), ⑥ Pitch(㎜),
⑦ Distance from the last taps to The both ends of shaft (㎜)
Distance from
DIA Diameter tolerance Standard length in stock L(㎜) Pitch the last taps
Tap size to both ends

0~-9

Linear Motion Shaft 275

G Linear Motion Shaft

Distance from
DIA. Diameter tolerance Standard length in stock L(mm) Pitch the last taps
Tap size to both ends

Note) Max. Lengths : DIA. 10 ~ 12mm : L.4000mm

DIA. 25mm ~ : L.6000mm

6 LM Shaft End Support Block & Rail

1. Shaft End Support Block
These support blocks can support the ends of LM. Plane
Shaft without special machining.
There are blocks for a plane and a wall.

2. Shaft Support Rail

This support rail supports the tapping machined
shaft in considering shaft deflection or vibration and
makes ‘Slide Rail Unit’ by being assembled with
open type of ball bushing.

Shaft Support Rail I

(ST) Shaft Support Rail II
(STU)

276 Linear Motion Shaft

WON ST CO., LTD.

WK type
Shaft Support End Block for a Plane

Unit : mm

Dimensions

Linear Motion Shaft

Tightening Holding down
Shaft
Part No. up Bolt Bolt
d
H S1 S2

- Material : Aluminum AL 6061

Linear Motion Shaft 277

G Linear Motion Shaft

S-ST type
Shaft Support Rail I

Application Ball Bushing Block - SHO

Unit : mm

Dimensions Mounting Dimensions

Shaft
Part No.
d

278 Linear Motion Shaft

WON ST CO., LTD.

ST type
Shaft Support Rail I

Application Ball Bushing Block - SHO

Unit : mm

Dimensions Mounting Dimensions

Linear Motion Shaft

Shaft
Part No.
d

Max
lenght
3m
Effective
for long
stroke
application

Note) P* can be changed for customer requirement

Linear Motion Shaft 279

G Linear Motion Shaft

S-STU type
Shaft Support Rail II

Application Ball Bushing Block - SHO, CSO

Unit : mm

Dimensions Mounting Dimensions

Shaft
Part No.
d

S-STU 16 X 50 Ø16 27 21 42 50 6 31 25 M5 M5
S-STU 20 X 50 Ø20 31 25 50 50 6 36 25 M6 M6
S-STU 25 X 50 Ø25 36 26.5 53 50 7 39 25 M6 M6
S-STU 30 X 60 Ø30 43 33.5 67 60 8 49 30 M8 M8
S-STU 40 X 70 Ø40 55 37 74 70 1 56 35 M8 M8

280 Linear Motion Shaft

WON ST CO., LTD.

STU type
Shaft Support Rail II

Application Ball Bushing Block - SHO, CSO

Dimensions Mounting Dimensions

Linear Motion Shaft

Shaft
Part No.
d

Max
lenght
3m
Effective
for long
stroke
application

Note) P* can be changed for customer requirement

Linear Motion Shaft 281

G Linear Motion Shaft

Slide Rail unit

Slide Rail Unit is consist of open type Block and Shaft with taps and Shaft support rail

- Assembly hight. A

Shaft support rail

Shaft
Open type

282 Linear Motion Shaft

WON ST CO., LTD.

Track Roller Guide

Contents

1 T.R Guide 6 End Seal(T type) •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 292

1. Structure & Features• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 284
2. Speed and Noise• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 285
3. Adjustable Clearance• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 285 7 Cap Seal •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 292
4. Load Capacity in any direction• • • • • • • • 285
5. Perfect Sealing and Lubrication•• • • • • • 285
6. Available Temperature• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 285
8 Cap Seal Assembly •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 292
7. Easy Installation• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 285

9 Accuracy •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 293
2 Guide Rail Series
1. Outside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 286
2. Inside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 287 10 Service Life
1. Basic Dynamic Load Ratings C
(Basic Dynamic Moment M)• • • • • • • • • • • 294
3 Types of Block 2. Basic Static Load Ratings Co
(Basic Static Moment Mo)• • • • • • • • • • • • • 294
T.R Guide
1. Outside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 288
3. Maximum allowable load•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • 294
2. Inside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 289
4. Service Life depending loads in any
direction•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 294
5. Service Life depending moment in any
4 Assembly and Adjustment direction•• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 294
1. Outside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 290
2. Inside Type• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 291

5 Track Roller •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 292

Track Roller Guide

H T.R Guide

1 T.R Guide
1. Structure & Features

Outside Type Cap Seal

Cap Seal protects track rollers and guide
rail from foreign debris and dust through
sealing each roller and it lubricates through
inner oil contained seal so that it increases
Roller Unit a travel life and a running speed.
Double raw angular contact ball
bearing is able to withstand radial
and thrust load acting on a guide.

Guide Rail
precisely surface finished and heat
treated shaft was inserted under
press in the guide rail.

Inside Type

Adjusting Screw
It is possible to slide precisely
as adjusting pre-load between a
guide rail and a track roller.

Roller Unit
End Seal
Double row angular contact ball bear-
End Seal protects track rollers and guide rail ing is able to withstand a radial and
from foreign debris and dusts through sealing thrust load acting on a guide.
at the end of block and provides a stable sliding.

284 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

WON Track Roller Guide has been developed by WON R&D Center based on knowledge and experience
for several years in the field of Linear Motion System. It consists of the guide rail inserted by applying
pressure onto a precisely grinded and heat treated (HRC 62) shaft and a roller unit.

2. Speed and Noise

Conventional Linear Motion Guide uses balls inside a sliding block and a series of balls recirculate in
sliding block. That is why makes a noise, vibration and low speed. In case of Track Roller Guide(T.R
Guide), it applies several roll bearings instead of a series of balls so that it is possible to reduce noise
and vibration at the maximum rotational speed as follows.
- Maximum Speed V max = 10 m/s
- Maximum Acceleration a max = 50 m/s 2

3. Adjustable Clearance
When preloads and backlashes are required between a guide rail and a track roller, it is feasible to adjust
a clearance by using an adjustable eccentric screw.

4. Load Capacity in any direction

Track Roller is double row angular contact ball bearing so it can withstand loads in any direction.

5. Perfect Sealing and Lubrication

Cap Seal protects track rollers and a guide rail from foreign debris and dusts through sealing each roller
and it provides lubrication into TR Guide through an inner oil contained seal.

6. Available Temperature
-20℃~ 80℃

T.R Guide
7. Easy Installation
It is easy to install and handle due to light weight
and compact structure. Because it provides a high
speed sliding, a high precision and a compact
structure, it is so easy to install and maintain that
this is a very economical Linear Motion System.

Track Roller Guide 285

H T.R Guide

2 Guide Rail Series

1. Outside Type

Standard Length & Maximum Length

The table below shows the standard lengths and the maximum lengths of a guide rail. If the maximum
length of a needed guide rail exceeds them, jointed rails will be used. When a special length is required,
Please contact us.

Unit : mm
Part No.

Standard
Length of
Guide Rail
(Lo)

286 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

2. Inside Type

TRI

Standard Length & Maximum Length

Unit : mm
Part No.

Standard
Length of T.R Guide
Guide Rail
(Lo)

Track Roller Guide 287

H T.R Guide

3 Types of Block
1. Outside Type
There are two kinds of blocks : Non-Adjustable Block and Adjustable Block.

- Non-Adjustable Block - Clearance Adjustable Block

Non-Adjustable Block assembled with a precise Clearance Adjustable Block is used for setting Zero
guide rail at the best fit has a clearance within 20 ㎛ clearance or putting preload.
between a rail and a block. It is unnecessary the
eccentric screw for adjusting clearance so that it is
economical in use.

Maximum Allowable Load

Unit : mm
Part No.

※ Service load shall not exceed the maximum allowable load shown in the table of maximum allowable load.(Refer to P294.)

288 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

2. Inside Type
There are two kinds of block available for an inside type of TR Guide: Non-Adjustable Block and Adjustable Block.

- Non-Adjustable Block - Clearance Adjustable Block

- Maximum Allowable Load

Unit : mm
Part No.

T.R Guide

※ Service load shall not exceed the maximum allowable load shown in the table of maximum allowable load.(Refer to P294.)

Track Roller Guide 289

H T.R Guide

4 Assembly and Adjustment

1. Outside Type
WON Track Roller Guide for a clearance adjustable block provides a precise sliding through adjusting
a clearance to zero.
1) Coaxial bearing being the criteria for an adjustment is completely fastened up but eccentric axial bearing is
fasten loosely so that remains enough a gap between a rail and an adjustable block.
2) With the state of the block assembled on guide rail, screws should be tighten up equally using a torque
wrench until an eccentric axial bearing is contacted with a guide rail properly.
A) If the block assembled moves smoothly and each of track rollers rotates, the eccentric axial bearing
should be adjusted correctly.
B) Please caution that it could shorten a life span of the eccentric axial bearing if the screws were
tightened up excessively.
3) If the eccentric axial bearing were adjusted exactly, Please fasten lock nuts and bolts referring to
recommended torque as below.

- Roller Assembly Torque(A) Unit : mm

Part No.

- Rail Assembly Torque(B)

Part No.

290 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

2. Inside Type
WON Track Roller Guide of an inside type (TRI) for a clearance adjustable block provides a precise
sliding through adjusting clearance to zero.
1) Non-adjustable bearing being the criteria for an adjustment is completely fastened up but an adjustable
bearing is fasten loosely so that remains enough a gap between a rail and an adjustable block.
2) With the state of the block assembled on a guide rail, the adjust screws at the side of block should be
tighten up equally using a torque wrench until a roller is contacted with a guide rail properly.
A) If the block assembled moves smoothly and each of track rollers rotates, the eccentric axial bearing
should be adjusted correctly.
B) Please caution that it could shorten a life span of LM System if the screws of adjustable bearing were
tightened up excessively.
4) Please prevent loosening of a bolt as fastening a lock bolt.

- Roller Assembly Torque Unit : mm

Part No. T.R Guide

- Rail Assembly Torque

Part No.

Track Roller Guide 291

H T.R Guide

5 Track Roller 7 Cap Seal

There are two kinds of rollers for a shaft, eccent- Cap Seal protects shafts and rollers from dusts
ric and concentric rollers. Track roller is 2 row and stock oil. By doing so, increase a travel life
angular contact ball bearing. and improves the stability of moving guide at
high speed.

Concentric Roller for Shaft

When it is not necessary to adjust a clearance
it is used.

8 Cap Seal Assembly

We recommend that a cap seal should be as-
sembled in the last step after completing the ad-
Eccentric Roller for Shaft justment of rollers. To install a cap seal on the
When it is necessary to adjust a clearance it is block, 1) Take off block from a guide rail, 2) As-
used. semble a cap seal to block temporary so that se-
cure an enough gap for a cap seal, 3) Assemble
a cap seal to a guide rail tighten, 4) Adjust the
gap between a cap seal and a block while ap-
proaching a cap seal to the surface of a shaft.

6 End Seal (T type)

Seal in the front and rear of the block protects a
Shaft & roller from dusts, and increases the Ser-
vice Life and stability of movement.

292 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

9 Accuracy
Accuracy of T.R Guide is measured as below method.

Fig 1. Measurement Method

T.R Guide

Fig 2. Accuracy

Track Roller Guide 293

H T.R Guide

10 Service Life
Service life refers to the total running distance that 90% of identical bearings in a group, when one locked
with another internally under the same conditions, can be achieved without developing flaking.
1. Basic Dynamic Load Ratings C (Basic Dynamic Moment M)
When a group of bearing under the same load(Moment) run, if 90% of them are not damaged and run
100Km, the load is called the basic dynamic load (Basic dynamic moment M).

2. Basic Static Load Ratings Co (Basic Static Moment Mo)

Basic Static Load Ratings Co (Basic Static Moment(Mo)) is a stationary force or couple applied to both
a raceway and rolling elements as much as 0.001 permanent deformations unchanging in magnitude,
points of application, and direction, which the sum of the permanent deformation on the rolling elements
and that of the raceway at a contact area under the maximum stress.
3. Maximum allowable load(maximum allowable moment)
Maximum allowable load(maximum allowable moment) is maximum moment which is allowed not only for
capability of load carrying of track roller but also for smooth linear motion as considering strength of a rail,
block and bolt.

4. S
ervice Life depending loads in 5. Service Life depending moment in
any direction any direction

L : Service life (m) L : Service life (m)

Lh : Service life (h) Lh : Service life (h)
Cyz : Basic dynamic load ratings of each direction (N) Mxyz : Allowable moment in each direction (N•m)
P : Applied load in each direction (N) M : Applied moment in each direction (N•m)
s : Stroke (m) s : Stroke (m)
n1 : The number of return (o.p.m.) n1 : The number of Cycles (o.p.m.)
※ When applied load is less than maximum allowable load ※ When applied moment is less than maximum allowable moment
Cyz, rating life shall be calculated from the equation above. Mxyz, rating life shall be calculated from the equation above.

294 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

STF type Guide Rail

Examples of model number formation

Type
Part No.
Rail Length

Unit : mm
Dimensions Rail Dimensions
Part No.

T.R Guide
※ Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & application

Track Roller Guide 295

H T.R Guide

TS type
Examples of model number formation

Type Part No.

Guide Rail Type : Solid(No Symbol), Hollow(H), Block Quantity
Block Type : Secure Type Block(B), Gap Arbitration Block(BC)
Capseal : No Sticking(No symbol), Sticking(S)
Rail Length

Basic Static Load Ratings and Moment

Basic load ratings Permissible Moment

Part No.

※ Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & application

※ Rails above TS 32H Size are hollow type.
※ The figure of rating load and moment is
for life time calculation and the figure of
maximum allowable load could be
referred to P288.

296 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Unit : mm
Basic load ratings Block Rail
Part No.
(max.)

T.R Guide

Secure Type Block Gap Arbitration Type Block

Track Roller Guide 297

H T.R Guide

TC type
Examples of model number formation

Type Part No. Block Quantity

Block Type : Secure Type Block(B), Gap Arbitration Block(BC)
Capseal : No Sticking(No symbol), Sticking(S) Rail Length

Basic Static Load Ratings and Moment

Basic load ratings Permissible Moment

Part No.

※ Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & application

※ The figure of rating load and moment is for life time calculation and the figure of maximum allowable load could
be referred to P288.

Order Made

298 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Unit : mm

Basic load ratings Block Rail

Part No.

T.R Guide
※ Please refer to 314pages for the standards.

Secure Type Block Gap Arbitration Type Block

Track Roller Guide 299

H T.R Guide

TF type
Examples of model number formation

Type Part No. Block Quantity

Block Type : Secure Type Block(B), Gap Arbitration Block(BC)
Capseal : No Sticking(No symbol), Sticking(S) Rail Length

Basic Static Load Ratings and Moment

Basic load ratings Permissible Moment

Part No.

※ Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & application

※ The figure of rating load and moment is for life time calculation and the figure of maximum allowable load could
be referred to P288.

300 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Unit : mm
Basic load ratings Block Rail
Part No.

T.R Guide

Secure Type Block Gap Arbitration Type Block

Track Roller Guide 301

H T.R Guide

TW type
Examples of model number formation

Type Part No. Block Quantity

Block Type : Secure Type Block(B), Gap Arbitration Block(BC)
Capseal : No Sticking(No symbol), Sticking(S) Rail Length

Basic Static Load Ratings and Moment

Basic load ratings Permissible Moment

Part No.

※ Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & application

※ The figure of rating load and moment is for life time calculation and the figure of maximum allowable load could
be referred to P288.

302 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Unit : mm

T.R Guide

Secure Type Block Gap Arbitration Type Block

Track Roller Guide 303

H T.R Guide

TRI - Standard Type

Examples of model number formation

Type Part No.

Block Length : Standard(No Symbol), Long Type(L)
Block Quantity
Block Type : Secure Block(B),Adjustment Block(BC)
Seal : No Seal(No Symbol), One Side Seal(U), Both Side Seal(UU)
Rail Length

Basic Static Load Ratings and Moment

Basic load ratings Permissible Moment

Part No.

※ Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & application

※ The figure of rating load and moment is for life time calculation and the
figure of maximum allowable load could be referred to P289.

304 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Unit : mm

Basic load ratings Block Rail

Part No.

T.R Guide

Secure Type Block Adjustment Block

Track Roller Guide 305

H T.R Guide

TRI - Long Type

Examples of model number formation

Type Part No.

Block Length : Standard(No Symbol), Long Type(L)
Block Quantity
Block Type : Secure Block(B),Adjustment Block(BC)
Seal : No Seal(No Symbol), One Side Seal(U), Both Side Seal(UU)
Rail Length

Basic Static Load Ratings and Moment

Basic load ratings Permissible Moment

Part No.

※ Please inquire us for your specially required dimensions & application

※ The figure of rating load and moment is for life time calculation and the
figure of maximum allowable load could be referred to P289.

306 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Unit : mm

Basic load ratings Block Rail

Part No.

T.R Guide

Secure Type Block Adjustment Block

Track Roller Guide 307

H T.R Guide

RF type / RA type Track Roller(Outside Type)

Examples of model number formation

Type : Coaxial Shaft Roller(RF), Eccentric Shaft Roller(RA)

Part No.

The load of an application roller

308 Track Roller Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Unit : mm

Application
Part No.
Rail

T.R Guide

Track Roller Guide 309

H T.R Guide

RFI type Track Roller(Inside Type)

Examples of model number formation

Type : Coaxial Shaft Roller(RFI)

Part No.
T.R Guide

Track Roller Guide 313

H T.R Guide

B type Bracket

Examples of model number formation

Type
Part No.

Unit : mm

Part No.

Bracket Assembly Torque

Part No.

314 T.R Guide

WON ST CO., LTD.

Appendix
Contents

1. Conversion Table from SI

(International System of Units)•••••••••••••••••••• 316
2. N-kgf Conversion Table••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 318
3. kg-lb Conversion Table• •••••••••••••••••••••••••• 319
4. Hardness Conversion Table•••••••••••••••••••••••320
Appendix

5. Dimensional Tolerance of Axis••••••••••••••••••••322

6. Dimensional Tolerance of Housing Hole• •••••••324
7. Usage examples of Linear Motion Guide••••••••326
8. Usage examples of Crossed Roller Bearing••••334

Appendix 附录
Appendix

1. Conversion Table from SI (International System of Units)

Comparison of SI, CGS and Engineering Units
System
Unit Length Mass Time Temp. Acceleration Force Stress Pressure Energy Power
SI m kg s K, ℃ m/s2 N Pa Pa J W
CGS System cm g s ℃ Gal dyn dyn/cm dyn/cm
2 2
erg erg/s
Engineering
m kgf · s2/m s ℃ m/s2 kgf kgf/m2 kgf/m2 kgf · m/ kgf · m/s
Unit System

Conversion Factors from SI Units

SI Units Units other than SI Conversion factors
Parameter
Names of unit Symbols Name and symbols of Unit from SI units
Degree ° 180/π
Angle Radian rad Minute ’ 10 180/π
Second ” 648 000/π
Micron μ 106
Length Meter m
Angstrom Å 1010
Are a 10-2
Area Square meter m2
Hectare ha 10-4
Liter l, L 103
Volume Cubic meter m3
Deciliter dl, dL 104
Minute min 1/60
Time Second s Hour h 1/3 600
Day d 1/86 400
No. of vibration Hertz Hz Cycle S-1 1
frequency
Speed of rotation Time per second s-1 Time per minute rpm 60
kilometer per hour km/h 3 600/1000
Speed Meter per second m/s
Knot kn 3 600/1852
Gal Gal 102
Acceleration Meter per second m/s2
g G 1/9.806 65
Mass Kilogram kg Ton T 10-3
Kilogram-force kgf 1/9.806 65
Force Newton N Tone-force tf 1/(9.806 65 X 103)
Dyne dyn 102
Torque & force
Newton meter N·m Kilogram-force kgf·m 1/9.806 65
moment
Pascal (Newton Pa Kilogram-force per kgf/cm2 1/(9.806 65 X 104)
Stress
per square meter) (N/m) square centimeter kgf/mm2 1/(9.806 65 X 106)

316 Appendix
WON ST CO., LTD.

Prefix Used in SI Units

Multiples Name and symbols of prefix Multiples Name and symbols of prefix
10 18
Exa E 10 -1
Deci d
1015 Peta P 10-2 Centi c
1012 Tera T 10-3 Milli m

109 Giga G 10-6 Micro μ

106 Mega M 10-9 Nano n
103 Kilo k 10-12 Pico p

102 Hecto h 10-15 Femto f

101 Deca da 10-18 Ato a

Conversion Factors from SI Units

SI Units Units other than SI Conversion factors
Parameter
Names of unit Sybols Name and symbols of Unit from SI units
Kilogram-force per kgf/m2 1/9.806 65
square centimeter mH2O 1/(9.806 65 X 103)
Pascal Aqua meter
Pa mmHg 760/(1.013 25 X 105)
Pressure (Newton per Mercury millimeter
(N/m 2
) Torr Torr 760/(1.013 25 X 105)
square meter)
Bar bar 10-5
Atmosphere atm 1/(1.013 25 X 105)
Erg erg 107
Calorie (international) calrr 1/4.186 8
Joule J
Energy Kilogram-force meter kgf·m 1/9.806 65
(Newton meter) (N·m)
Kilowatt-hour kM·h 1/(3.6 X 106)
French horsepower hour PS·h ≈3.776 72 X 10-7

W Kilogram-force per second kgf·m/s 1/9.806

Watt
Power Kilogram per hour kcal/h 1/1.163
(Newton meter) (J/S)
French horsepower hour PS ≈1/735.498 8
Viscosity, Viscosity, Index Pascal Pa·s Poise P 10
Kinematic viscosity, Square Stokes St 104
m2/s
Kinematic viscosity index meter/second Centistokes cSt 106
Temperature, Temperature variation Kelvin, Celsius K, ℃ Degree ℃ [주(1)참조]
Appendix

Current, magnetomotive force Ampere A Ampere A 1

Current, electromotive force Volt V (Watt/ampere) (W/A) 1
Magnetic intensity Ampere per meter A/m Oersted Oe 4π/103
Magnetic flux Gauss Gs 104
Tesla T
density Gamma 109
Electric resistance Ohm Ampere/volt (V/A) 1
Note 1 Thetemperature conversion from TK to θ℃ is θ=T-273.15, but for a temperature variation, it is ΔT=Δθ,
But, ΔT and Δθ represent temperature variation measured using the Kelvin and Celsius scales respectively.
Remarks The names and symbols in parenthesis are equivalent to those directly above or on the left
Example 1N=1/9.809 65kg

Appendix 317
Appendix

2. N-kgf Conversion Table

[How to Read] For example, to convert 10N into kgf, read the figure in the right kgf column adjacent to
the 10 in the center column in the 1st block. This means that 10N is 1.0197kgf. To convert
10kgf into N, read the figure in the left N column of the same row, which indicates that the
answer is 98.066N. 1N=0.1019716kgf
1kgf=9.80665 N

318 Appendix
WON ST CO., LTD.

3. N-lb Conversion Table

[How to Read] For example, to convert 10kg into lb, read the figure in the right lb column adjacent to the 10
in the center column in the 1st block. This means that 10kg is 22.046lb. To convert 10lb into
kg, read the figure in the left kg column of the same row, which indicates that the answer
is 4.536kg. 1kg=2.2046226lb
1lb=0.45359237kg

Appendix

Appendix 319
Appendix

4. Hardness Conversion Table

Brinell Hardness Rockwell Hardness
Rockwell
A Scale B Scale
C-Scale Vickers Shear
Standard Tungsten 588.4N 980.7N
Hardness Hardness Hardness
ball carbide ball (69kgf) (100kgf)
(1 471N)
brallel 1.588mm
paricle (1/16 in)

326 Appendix
WON ST CO., LTD.

Appendix

Appendix 327
Appendix

328 Appendix
WON ST CO., LTD.

Appendix

Appendix 329
Appendix

330 Appendix
WON ST CO., LTD.

Appendix

Appendix 331
Appendix

332 Appendix
WON ST CO., LTD.

Appendix

Appendix 333
Appendix

8. Usage examples of Crossed Roller Bearing

334 Appendix
WON ST CO., LTD.

Appendix

Appendix 335
Appendix

336 Appendix
WON ST CO., LTD.

Appendix

Appendix 337
Appendix

338 부록
LINEAR MOTION SYSTEM
CAT NO. W201908-EN6

Even though we are doing the best to write our manual book,
our product’s spec could be edited to develop.
If you have questions for our products please contact us for detail.

New ZKL General Catalogue
100% (1)
New ZKL General Catalogue
644 pages
SKF Rolling Bearings Catalogue PDF
100% (10)
SKF Rolling Bearings Catalogue PDF
1,363 pages
Bearing Detail PDF
100% (1)
Bearing Detail PDF
1,152 pages
SKF Rolling Bearings Catalogue
100% (1)
SKF Rolling Bearings Catalogue
1,380 pages
General Rolling Bearings Catalogue
No ratings yet
General Rolling Bearings Catalogue
1,154 pages
Split Marine Bearings
No ratings yet
Split Marine Bearings
100 pages
Engineering and Lubrication Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Engineering and Lubrication Manual PDF
212 pages
Bearing Selection 13383 2 en
100% (1)
Bearing Selection 13383 2 en
424 pages
General Catalogue
100% (1)
General Catalogue
200 pages
Timken Engineering Manual
No ratings yet
Timken Engineering Manual
210 pages
Rolling Bearings For Industrial Machinery E1103b - 2
100% (1)
Rolling Bearings For Industrial Machinery E1103b - 2
461 pages
TIMKEN Engineering Explanations
100% (1)
TIMKEN Engineering Explanations
240 pages
Timken
No ratings yet
Timken
258 pages
The Shahnameh: The Persian Epic in World Literature Hamid Dabashi Download
100% (2)
The Shahnameh: The Persian Epic in World Literature Hamid Dabashi Download
59 pages
KBC PDF
No ratings yet
KBC PDF
245 pages
CatalogoCHG CLC 21022023
No ratings yet
CatalogoCHG CLC 21022023
235 pages
Cylindrical Roller Bearings
No ratings yet
Cylindrical Roller Bearings
106 pages
Rodamientos SKF
No ratings yet
Rodamientos SKF
1,380 pages
Timken Engineering Manual
100% (4)
Timken Engineering Manual
210 pages
Biology Seed Germination Experiment
100% (1)
Biology Seed Germination Experiment
7 pages
Abma 11-2014
No ratings yet
Abma 11-2014
28 pages
KBC Bearings Catalog LTR
100% (1)
KBC Bearings Catalog LTR
244 pages
Bearing 1
No ratings yet
Bearing 1
5 pages
Design Consideration - 10000 EN
No ratings yet
Design Consideration - 10000 EN
80 pages
NSK
No ratings yet
NSK
455 pages
5912 - Aerospace Design Guide
No ratings yet
5912 - Aerospace Design Guide
60 pages
Timken Engineerig Manual - 10424
No ratings yet
Timken Engineerig Manual - 10424
220 pages
Fafnir Catalogo Rodamientos de Super Precision para Aplicaciones en
No ratings yet
Fafnir Catalogo Rodamientos de Super Precision para Aplicaciones en
252 pages
en Rolling Bearings and Seals in Electric Motors and Generators
No ratings yet
en Rolling Bearings and Seals in Electric Motors and Generators
146 pages
96 Katalog Barden4
No ratings yet
96 Katalog Barden4
148 pages
KBC Bearings Catalog LTR PDF
0% (1)
KBC Bearings Catalog LTR PDF
244 pages
Bearing Guide
100% (1)
Bearing Guide
81 pages
LLU Roller Rail Guides Catalogue - 16404 (EN)
No ratings yet
LLU Roller Rail Guides Catalogue - 16404 (EN)
64 pages
Financial Analysis of A Selected Company
100% (1)
Financial Analysis of A Selected Company
20 pages
Cylindrical and Tapered Roller Bearings: Catalog A-1500-Iii
No ratings yet
Cylindrical and Tapered Roller Bearings: Catalog A-1500-Iii
210 pages
Timken - Soportes Partidos Revolvo (Ingles)
No ratings yet
Timken - Soportes Partidos Revolvo (Ingles)
100 pages
Timken Fafnir Super Precision Bearings For Machine Tool Applications - 5918 PDF
No ratings yet
Timken Fafnir Super Precision Bearings For Machine Tool Applications - 5918 PDF
252 pages
Gray Hair and Excessive Facial and Body Hair Proto
100% (1)
Gray Hair and Excessive Facial and Body Hair Proto
6 pages
MiniThin Bearing Catalog
No ratings yet
MiniThin Bearing Catalog
124 pages
6402EN Technical Handbook RZ Bildschirmversion
100% (1)
6402EN Technical Handbook RZ Bildschirmversion
60 pages
5.cylindrical Roller Bearings - 10000 en
No ratings yet
5.cylindrical Roller Bearings - 10000 en
106 pages
NSK Bearing Replacement Guide PDF
No ratings yet
NSK Bearing Replacement Guide PDF
275 pages
5918 Machine Tool Catalog 1
No ratings yet
5918 Machine Tool Catalog 1
240 pages
ZVL ZKL
No ratings yet
ZVL ZKL
120 pages
Design of Pressure Vessel
No ratings yet
Design of Pressure Vessel
91 pages
Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics - Gillesania
No ratings yet
Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics - Gillesania
308 pages
Living and Non Living Things DLP Final Exam Prepared by Jessica Carolino...
No ratings yet
Living and Non Living Things DLP Final Exam Prepared by Jessica Carolino...
5 pages
Lesson 2 - Rights and Obligations of Parties
No ratings yet
Lesson 2 - Rights and Obligations of Parties
9 pages
NTN Bower
No ratings yet
NTN Bower
205 pages
Struers Prestopress3 Embedded Press
No ratings yet
Struers Prestopress3 Embedded Press
23 pages
Hazard Analysis and Risk Assessments For Industrial Processes Using FMEA and Bow-Tie Methodologies
No ratings yet
Hazard Analysis and Risk Assessments For Industrial Processes Using FMEA and Bow-Tie Methodologies
13 pages
Crypto8e Merged
100% (1)
Crypto8e Merged
492 pages
The Art of Strategy and Force Planning
No ratings yet
The Art of Strategy and Force Planning
14 pages
He Mrut 006
No ratings yet
He Mrut 006
3 pages
Altivar 61 For Medium Voltage Motors
No ratings yet
Altivar 61 For Medium Voltage Motors
34 pages
Sow and Comp For Petanque Court
No ratings yet
Sow and Comp For Petanque Court
6 pages
EnviroBLASTO: A Calculator For Estimating The Environmental Impacts of Rock Blasting
No ratings yet
EnviroBLASTO: A Calculator For Estimating The Environmental Impacts of Rock Blasting
6 pages
Super-Precision Angular Contact Ball Bearings High-Speed E Design 10112 3 en
No ratings yet
Super-Precision Angular Contact Ball Bearings High-Speed E Design 10112 3 en
52 pages
Rebooting The Indian Startup Ecosystem: A Case Study by T-Hub
No ratings yet
Rebooting The Indian Startup Ecosystem: A Case Study by T-Hub
3 pages
IT Based Decision Making in Health Care
No ratings yet
IT Based Decision Making in Health Care
5 pages
Official Resume
No ratings yet
Official Resume
1 page
Portfolio Write-Up
No ratings yet
Portfolio Write-Up
4 pages
Futuretech Olympiad 2022
No ratings yet
Futuretech Olympiad 2022
12 pages
Od123134082577368000 2
No ratings yet
Od123134082577368000 2
2 pages
One Snowy Night
No ratings yet
One Snowy Night
7 pages
Semantic Textual Similarity With Siamese Neural Networks: Tharindu Ranasinghe, Constantin or Asan and Ruslan Mitkov
No ratings yet
Semantic Textual Similarity With Siamese Neural Networks: Tharindu Ranasinghe, Constantin or Asan and Ruslan Mitkov
8 pages
FLYLITE - Pilot Training Program Effective AUGUST 01, 2022 Trainee Copy RV080822
No ratings yet
FLYLITE - Pilot Training Program Effective AUGUST 01, 2022 Trainee Copy RV080822
11 pages
Review of Hussain Sagar Lake Pollution, Hyderabad, India
No ratings yet
Review of Hussain Sagar Lake Pollution, Hyderabad, India
7 pages
Prakash Dafadar: Electrical Engineer Profile
No ratings yet
Prakash Dafadar: Electrical Engineer Profile
3 pages
Butterfly Arrow 500 W Mixer Grinder: Grand Total 1625.00
No ratings yet
Butterfly Arrow 500 W Mixer Grinder: Grand Total 1625.00
1 page
Technical Data Sheet: Zwaluw Fix-O-Chem (Styrene Free)
No ratings yet
Technical Data Sheet: Zwaluw Fix-O-Chem (Styrene Free)
2 pages
1st Sem Result
No ratings yet
1st Sem Result
1 page

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.